Home

NEC Express5800/120Rf

Contents

1. FRONT DIMM 1 Group 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 3 Group 2 DIMM 4 DIMM 5 Group 3 DIMM 6 DIMM 7 5 Group 4 L DIMM 8 Mother board IMPORTANT Install two additional DIMMs for each group because the server uses interleaved memory If DIMMs of different specifications are installed in a bank the server does not operate normally A group is a unit of two DIMM slots Each pair of DIMM slots 1 and 2 group 1 3 and 4 group 2 5 and 6 group 3 and 7 and 8 group 4 in the figure is a group The symbols are also printed on the mother board 2 DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows Example Frequency of 400 MHz buffered capacity of 512 MB row address of 12 bits column address of 10 bits and single side 400 B 512 R12 C10 S Single side Column address Row address Capacity Buffered Frequency 9 24 Upgrading Your Server Installation Install a DIMM in the following procedure e 0O N 2 IMPORTANT The server supports DIMMs of only the low profile type 30 mm 1 2 inches in height It does not support DIMMs exceeding the specified height See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Open the logic cover Push the DIMM straight into the socket
2. Error Error message Recommended Action code 02D1 System Memory exceeds the CPU s caching Contact your service representative limit 02F4 EISA CMOS not write able 02F5 DMA Test Failed 02F6 Software NMI Failed 02F7 Fail safe Timer NMI Failed 0B22 Processors are installed out of order Request the maintenance to replace the CPU 0B28 Unsupported Processor detected on Make sure that the server supports the CPU Processor 1 If you are not sure contact your service 0B29 Unsupported Processor detected on representative to request the maintenance Processor 2 0B30 FAN1 Alarm occurred Contact your service representative to replace 0B31 FAN2 Alarm occurred the fan 0B32 FAN3 Alarm occurred 0B33 FAN4 Alarm occurred 0B34 FANS Alarm occurred 0B35 FAN6 Alarm occurred 0B36 FAN7 Alarm occurred 0B37 FAN8 Alarm occurred 0B38 FAN9 Alarm occurred 0B39 FAN10 Alarm occurred OB5F Forced to use Processor with error Because an error is detected in every CPU the system is forcibly started Contact your service representative 0OB60 DIMM group 1 has been disabled Contact your service representative 0B61 DIMM group 2 has been disabled 0B62 DIMM group 3 has been disabled 0B70 The error occurred during temperature Contact your service representative sensor reading 0B71 System Temperature out of the range Contact your service representative
3. me REAR Fix the heat sink clips with four screws 12 9 30 Upgrading Your Server 13 Make sure that the heat sink is level NOTES m Ifthe heat sink is not level remove it and then install it again The following probably causes the heat sink not to be level The CPU is not positioned correctly All screws are not completely tightened Do not move the secured heat sink 14 Install the processor air duct NOTE Put the SCSI cable through the tunnel under the full length riser card receiver of the bracket Attach the bracket while making sure that the cable is not caught in the bracket Also make sure that the signal cable from the power supply unit that runs through the slit on the left side of the bracket is not caught when attaching the bracket Lay the SCSI cable as shown in the figure below 15 16 17 18 19 Upgrading Your Server 9 31 Install the covers you removed previously Power on the server start the SETUP utility and set Processor Retest of Processor Settings on the Main menu to Enable Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages li
4. IMPORTANT To avoid system malfunction leave other jumpers at its default position If the remote management card is installed in your server follow these steps to configure the firmware program 8 Place the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the server 9 Run Initialize Remote Management Card Refer to Chapter 6 for details 9 48 Upgrading Your Server Removal Follow these steps to remove or replace the hot swap fan 1 2 3 Pull out the server from the rack Open the drive cover Locate the failed fan Fault LED on the fan turns on when a fan failure occurs A fan failure is also indicated by NEC ESMPRO and system event log While pressing release tabs on the top of the fan pull the fan up to remove from the fan slot Install the new fan into the vacant slot IMPORTANT If all the redundant fans are removed Change the jumper J11 setting described earlier in the installation procedure If the remote management card is installed in your server follow these steps to configure the firmware program Upgrading Your Server 9 49 Remote Management Card RMC Remote Management card RMC is an optional expansion card that includes the Baseboard Management Controller BMC based on IPMI 1 5 See Chapter 2 for detail functions of RMC IMPORTANT The RMC is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the meta
5. Fade wos Sew ee me _ Troubleshooting 8 3 LEDS The server includes LEDs to indicate the server states by a variety of colors and display patterns on the front panel hard disk drive and power supply Chapter 2 Status Indicators lists the LED displays and their meanings and the actions taken at occurrences of failures 8 4 Troubleshooting ERROR MESSAGES If an error occurs in the server an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server Error Messages after Power on Powering on the server automatically starts the self diagnostic program POST Power On Self Test When the POST detects any error it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors However even when there is no hardware failure use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing m Immediately after the server is powered m Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction simultaneous key entry of Ctrl Alt Delete Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction m During hardware initialization following restart of the POST When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason restart the server once again If the same error message reappears you may assume there is no hardware error T
6. Reassemble the server Turn on the server and check that the no error messages other than the following message are displayed on the POST screen H W Configuration of BMC is corrupted Update BMC H W Configuration by configuration tooll Refer to BMC configuration manual Refer to Chapter 8 for POST error messages 10 11 12 13 14 Upgrading Your Server 9 51 Place the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the server Run Initialize Remote Management Card Refer to Chapter 6 for details Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that the menus related to the RMC are displayed Refer to Chapter 4 for details If no additional menus are displayed reinstall the RMC In the BIOS SETUP utility select Yes for Reset Configuration Data in the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details Reboot the server and run NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to save system information Refer to Chapter 3 or 6 for details If the advanced remote management card is installed and KVM console feature is used update the graphics accelerator see Chapter 5 NOTE Refer to the manual that comes with an optional advanced remote management card for the monitor resolution Override installation of NEC ESMPRO Agent if installed To correct the system information and event log from the management PC NEC ESMPRO Agent must b
7. ceccceseesseescesceesceeseeeeceeceecesecnseeaecsaecsaecneeceecaeenseeees 8 29 Saving the Dumip Filete e E RE E E E AEE E OR 8 30 Recovery for Windows 2000 Systemerne i o EE ER EEEE OE RRE 8 31 Off Line Maint narice Utlity rean a RE E S aged ete E E EA E R 8 34 Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility 00 0 ee ceeceseceseceseeseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesereeeeens 8 35 Features of Off line Maintenance Utility cece ceccesecssecseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseceseceseeeeeseenseenaes 8 36 Resetting the Server arean Mok ce E costeeske lene OEI ate eet hee ease 8 37 Forced Shutdown stienen oi E NEEE EEEE E E EN E EE E Ei EES 8 38 Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ssssssssenenunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 9 1 DaletysNOteS PE AEST EEE TE TE E T SAE 9 2 Antizstatic Mea UE Sa a E a a e aa a a aA e e E p o Eai EEEa EAE 9 3 Preparing Your System for Upgrade cecccscccssesssesscesscessceecesecaecaecsaeaeceaecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeerenatens 9 4 Device Installation or Removal Procedure cecccsseesseessessceeeeeeecesecesecaecnaecaeecaeeeaeeneeeeeeeerenstens 9 5 Hard Disk Driven seb eet tiesto hate eee aa EREE tet ae ar ees 9 5 Power Supply Unit SCSI Hot plug HDD Model eee ceeceeesceeeceseceneceseeeeeceeeaeenseeneeenes 9 14 Server Pull out from the Rack sccce s scecceceseedetessedcnvescueseadecesseaeetvess cee ceededeacessesteevsecteesveede 9 18 Drive Covers satis edt ites tatiana
8. gt Complete appears only when you first entered the Role of Computer screen Once you go to the next screen from Role of Computer the Complete will not appear even if you enter Back to go back to the Role of Computer screen Select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration but the OS is installed in the whole area of the disk Is there any other partition than the partition to re use excluding maintenance area If the partition other than the one to re use does not exist the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000 Specified to join the Domain but the system is installed as Workgroup When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation it will install the system as Workgroup Open System in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain Specified large value as partition size but when Windows 2000 is actually started the system partition is created by 4095MB Is the Partition Size specified by the value larger than the real area If you want to create one partition in all area of the hard disk drive excluding the maintenance area to install the OS specify AI Area lt For Windows 2000 gt Are you specifying over 200GB for the partition size Be sure to specify less than 200GB for the partition size Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value Ifthe specified display resolution can not be
9. General Description 2 11 STATUS LED Description Procedure indication On green The server is operating normally Flashing The server is operating with the Identify the device in degraded state green memory or CPU in degraded by using the BIOS setup utility state SETUP and replace it as soon as An uncorrectable memory error possible has often occurred Off The power is off POST is in progress Wait for a while The STATUS LED turns green when POST is completed A CPU error occurred Turn the power off and then turn it on A CPU temperature alarm was If the POST screen displays an error detected IERR message take notes of the message A timeout occurred when the time and contact your sales representative set for the watchdog timer arrived A CPU bus error occurred A memory dump request is made Wait until the memory dump is completed On amber A temperature alarm was detected Check if the internal fans are clean and if the fan units are firmly connected If the STATUS LED indication does not change when the fans are normal contact your sales representative A voltage alarm was detected Contact your sales representative The power supply units failed Flashing A fan alarm was detected Check if the fan units are firmly amber connected If the STATUS LED indication does not change when the fans are normal contact your sales representative
10. sssssesseeserssserssssersesseeee D 14 Re install the Network Driver ccsccc5 es c0ss cccieec des tessa deteeddediasstea sce eeve a ei i D 14 Graphics Accelerator Driver sroine ii a RE EEE AEE E E ak Es D 15 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 75 95 N8190 126 ssssssesesssesssssssersessreesseree D 15 Installing RAID Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F ceccececsecesecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenrenseens D 16 Setting for Collecting Memory Dump Debug Information ececceeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeseenees D 16 Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeneneeeeeeeees E 1 Before Installing Windows Server 2003 ccsccescceseeesecesecseeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeseceseeeeneenseenseenseenaes E 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ce eccccceecceecceseeeteceseeteeeteenseenaes E 1 Installing Service Pack c sscasdes iio seg tie epece aves A AE E 2 Updating Systein PEE E ease ceiat asta E E ciate Mantes hte E 2 Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk E 2 Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F 86 and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection cccecccsseessessseesceesceeecesecescnseceaeenseceaeceaecaeeeseeeneeneeenrees E 2 MO Device ic cis a sateen ati tas anet re ec lan ciaa ters Shas tied ianton Shia tes tags oS At ots E 3 Partition SIZ z iota tepals teehee hich A E E 3 About the Upgrade to Windows Serv
11. If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen execute forced shutdown forced shutdown continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds The power will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log Description D The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with this system contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors is supported Q Has the CPU been expanded If the different revision stepping of the processor is installed in the multiprocessor system Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup If this message is logged it is no problem for operation The OS presents unstable operation Q Did you update the system Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable operation Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to update the system See Chapter 6 When any trouble occurred the system does not run according to the specification of Restart automatically When any trouble occurred on Windows 2000 the system may not restart automatically even if Restart automatically is specified In such case restart the system manually Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue sc
12. Take the CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive confirm that it is not dirty or injured reset and click OK Troubleshooting 8 15 Fail to access the hard disk drive Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller m m Is the hard disk drive applicable to the server Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Is the hard disk drive properly installed Make sure to lock the hard disk drive with the lever on its handle The hard disk drive is not connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed see Chapter 9 Fail to access the external SCSI devices m m Is the SCSI device applicable to the server Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Are SCSI devices properly configured When the server has external SCSI devices connected hard disk drive settings including SCSI ID and terminator are required Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details Are the SCSI controllers including optional controllers properly configured Use the BIOS SETUP utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector on the mother board When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it use the BIOS SETUP utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper configuration See the manual that comes with the op
13. A WARNING Y Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow as Ay these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages h S 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not lift the server only by a single person Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack 1 Release the security lock to remove the front bezel Security lock 2 Confirm that the power of the server is OFF and disconnect the power cable and all the interface cables connected to the server 3 lt This step is required only when the optional cable arm is mounted gt Remove the two screws securing the cable arm and dismount the cable arm from the server 4 Loosen the two captive thumb screws Setting Up Your Server 3 15 5 Hold the handle and pull out the server from the rack slowly and carefully The server clicks to be latched Captive thumb screws Handles 6 Pull out the server from the rack with the right and left release lever pressed to release the latch IMPORTANT
14. A temperature warning was detected Check if the internal fans are clean and if the fan units are firmly connected If the STATUS LED indication does not change when the fans are normal contact your sales representative A voltage warning was detected Contact your service representative 2 12 General Description DISK ACCESS LED jg The DISK ACCESS LED indicates the status of the hard disk drive mounted in the 3 5 inch disk bay The LED turns green each time access is made to the hard disk drive When the DISK ACCESS LED turns amber it indicates that a hard disk drive failure has occurred Check the hard disk drive LED for the status of the failing hard disk drive IMPORTANT If a hard disk drive in the server is connected to the internal disk array controller which is additionally mounted the access LED signal cable connected to the connector on the mother board must be connected from the disk array controller to the mother board ACT LED The ACT LED is green while the server is connected to the LAN The LED flashes while the server is accessed via the LAN during transmission reception of packets The number next to the icon indicates the network port number on the rear panel of the server UID LED UID Pressing the UID switch toggles the front panel UID LED blue and the mother board UID LED on and off The mother board UID LED is visible through the rear of the chassis and a
15. Click Start menu and click Network and Dial Up Connection The Network and Dial Up Connection dialog box appears Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter Click OK on the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process from Network and Dial up Connection to display the property dialog box for local area network NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter When PROSet is installed 1 Double click Intel R PROSet on the Control Panel window The Intel R PROSet dialog box appears Double click the Intel R PROSet Wired icon Put the cursor to the network driver in the list Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified f
16. IMPORTANT m If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS Uninterruptive Power Supply make sure that the power control device is powered m If the power cord is connected to the server an initial diagnosis of the hardware starts The POWER switch does not work while in diagnosis Wait for about 10 seconds then press the POWER switch m Always allow POST to complete before powering down your system 2 32 General Description POST POST Power On Self Test is the self diagnostic program stored in the system memory When you power on the server the system automatically runs POST to check the mother board ECC memory module CPU module keyboard and mouse POST also displays messages of the BIOS setup utility such as the start up message while in progress NEC With the factory setup of the server the NEC logo appears on the display unit while POST is in progress To display the POST check results press Esc NOTE You can set the POST check results to appear on the display unit without pressing Esc To do so select Enabled for Boot time Diag Screen under the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility The POST check results should be checked in the following cases m When the server is used for the first time m When the server appears to fail m When the server beeps for many times between power on and OS start up m When an error message appears on the display u
17. IMPORTANT Two methods of LAN and the serial port are mentioned in Chapter 6 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER in the way of communicating in remote console Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remote console The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics Procedures to start the diagnostics program is as follows Shutdown the OS and turn off the server Then unplug the power cord 2 Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server 3 Plug the power cord and turn on the server 4 Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to reboot the server See the Chapter 6 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for details The following menu appears when started the server using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER a S S j 5S Express Setup Local console Remote console 5 Select Tools 6 Maintenance 7 9 Select System Diagnostics The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes When the diagnosis completes the screen of the display changes in the following indication Diagnosis tool title Test windows title TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Gane il 1m peH Test End Test result Start10 06 58 End 10 09 58 Pass 000 03 00 TestTime 000 03 00 Test End NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00 lt System gt CACHE Cache 49 count NormalEnd lt SCSI gt HDD_02 000 DK32DJ 36W 89 count NormalEnd Enter Detail Information ESC Return to Enduser Menu
18. Processor Settings to confirm that the ID and L2 Cache of the additional CPU are defined normally see Chapter 4 2 Set Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu to Yes This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 33 PCI Board The server has a riser card assembly on the mother board that enable installation of PCI boards The riser card assembly can hole up to two PCI boards Insert PCI boards for network extension and file device function extension into PCI board slots in each riser card IMPORTANT m The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures m Some restrictions are imposed on the combination of PCI boards which can be installed in the server Contact your service representative for details m Ariser card is designed for installing only low profile PCI boards or full height PCI boards Before installing a PCI board make sure of the card specification m Disable the option ROM such as BIOS utility startup for the PCI slot if the SCSI controller disk array controller LAN board network booting or FibreChannel controlle
19. The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically Installing Windows 2000 F 15 Installing RAID Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F To additionally install the N8103 80F 81F in a system containing Windows 2000 connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver 1 When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears click Next 2 When the Install Hardware Device Drivers dialog box appears select Search for a suitable driver for my device Recommended and click Next 3 When the Locate Driver Files dialog box appears select Floppy disk drives insert Windows Server 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next 4 When the Driver Files Search Results dialog box appears click Next 5 Copying of the driver is completed and the Completion of the new hardware detection wizard dialog box below appears Click Complete Available switch options for Windows 2000 Boot ini file Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot ini File For the available switch options refer to the following information m Microsoft Kno
20. 8 Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 56 95 N8 190 126 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically Installing RAID Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F To additionally install the N8103 80F 81F in a system containing Windows 2000 connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver 1 When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears click Next 2 When the Install Hardware Device Drivers dialog box appears select Search for a suitable driver for my device Recommended and click Next 3 When the Locate Driver Files dialog box appears select Floppy disk drives insert Windows Server 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next When the Driver Files Search Results dialog box appears click Next 5 Copying of the driver is completed and the Completion of the new hardware detection wizard dialog box below appears Click Complete Installing the Operating System with Expr
21. MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Adaptec I20 RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000 XP 2003 When N8103 86 board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear After installation is completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of this manual Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical drives exist Before Re installing the Operation System Be sure to make backup copies before re installing the operation system just in case Re installing the Operation System 1 Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual 2 Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following message appears The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume Confirm the proper drive letter is assigned and then continue the setup 3 Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this chapter The drive letter of the re installed system may differ from the one of the previous system If you need to modify
22. NOTE Make sure of the orientation of the DIMM Position the DIMM so that a notch in the bottom edge of the DIMM aligns with the keyed socket Applying too much pressure can damage the socket Keyed DIMMs insert only one way IMPORTANT To avoid damage to the socket do not apply excessive force while pressing the DIMM The levers automatically close when the DIMM is inserted into the socket WM Key slot Key Install the components you removed in steps to 3 Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 Start the SETUP and select Advanced Memory Configuration to verify that the installed DIMM shows the status Normal See Chapter 4 or details Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details If the Windows operating system is in use set the paging file size to the recommended value total memory size x 1 5 or a greater value See Chapter 5 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 25 Removal Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure aa a al NOTES m To remove the failed DIMM check the error message appearing in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket group in which the failed DIMM is installed m The
23. Option Parameter Description Your Setting Processor Retest No If yes BIOS will clear historical Yes processor status and retest the processor on the next boot Processor Speed nnn GHz Displays clock speed for the processor View only Processor 1 CPUID Numeral Displays CPU ID for processor if Disabled present Disabled indicates that the processor is defected View only Processor 1 L2 Cache nnn KB Displays L2 cache size for processor Processor 2 CPUID Numeral Displays CPU ID for processor if Disabled present Disabled indicates that the processor is defected View only Processor 2 L2 Cache nnn KB Displays L2 cache size for processor Hyper Threading Enabled Disable or enable the Hyper Technology Disabled Threading Technology Execute Disable Bit Disabled Displays the CPU which supports Enabled Execute Disable Bit Factory set 4 8 Configuring Your Server Advanced Option Parameter Description Your Setting Memory Configuration Displays Memory Configuration submenu PCI Configuration Displays PCI Configuration submenu Peripheral Configuration Displays Peripheral Configuration submenu Advanced Chipset Control Displays Advanced Chipset Control submenu Boot time Diagnostic Enabled When disabled the BIOS will display Screen Disabled the NEC logo during POST Press Esc to switch to the POST execution screen Reset Configuration Data No Select Y
24. You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk drive if the computer is restarted normally 8 34 Troubleshooting OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY The Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program When you are unable to start the OS dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem the Off line Maintenance Utility can be used IMPORTANT m The Off line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your service representative The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility but do not attempt to use the utility by yourself Contact your service representative and follow instructions m Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server Troubleshooting 8 35 Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways m From the CD ROM Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and reboot the system After the menu is displayed on the screen select Tools Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD ROM m From the floppy disk Set the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk The Off line Maintenance
25. N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller D 2 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions lt SATA Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SATA Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu Re installing to the Hard disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue m Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process pop up messages may appear This does not affect on system behavior Click YES and continue the installation Follow the message hereafter Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 3 MO Device If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device
26. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server The disk array and maintenance partition are automatically configured 6 12 Installing and Using Utilities Tools When you select the Tools on the Top Menu the following screen appears The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Local Console are displayed See the previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items IMPORTANT The following is varied from the Tools menu in the local console mode m Test items and operation method of System Diagnostics See Chapter 7 for details Installing and Using Utilities 6 13 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows Based Master Control Menu The Master Control Menu is used to m Read the User s Guide or the other documents m Update the NEC Express5800 system and m Install the management software NOTES m Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 or later or Windows NT 4 0 or later m Some documents are provided in the PDF format Use the Adobe Acrobat Reader to read these documents GA EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu x Online Document NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series f NSL O Guit Copyright NEC Corporation N EC Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically If
27. m Pull out the server slowly holding the bottom of the server by at least two persons Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack Doing so may cause personal injury if the server drops To remove some mechanical parts of the rack see the installation procedure Release lever 3 16 Setting Up Your Server CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES Connect peripheral devices to the server The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of peripheral devices on its front and rear The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices A CAUTION A A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the NEC Express Server plugged to a power source a Do not use any unauthorized interface cable IMPORTANT Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures To connect a third party peripheral device or interface cable to the server consult with your service representative for availability of such a device or cable Some third party devices may not be used
28. 5 34 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup The Flow of Setup This section shows the flow of the Express Setup Process that proceeds automatically Process that needs to input or selec Do you want to use the parameters file in order to set up the Express server Yes No Read notes and restrictions Confirmed Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Confirmed Confirmed New File peiaretancevies Select Setup Parameter File Existing File Checking the Setup Parameter File Skipped Correct i A Disk Array Configuration Dialogue box appears v J Select whether or not to confirm modify the setting Confirmed Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities i t l Operating System Installation Menu appears yy Creating a working partition Confirm Setup File Create New File No Floppy Disk In case Skip is selected Choose the Windows category Remove the Floppy Disk and CD ROM from the Drive 44 Insert Windows CD ROM Confirm or input parameters for the Windows installation Copying NEC Modules 4 Copying Selected Application Modules tti Agree Software License Agreement y Insert SP CD ROM If you selected Yes on Apply Service Pack RER Install OS Automa
29. RAID Level F WiteMode Automatic seting Manual setting z 6 16 Installing and Using Utilities 7 Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click Next NOTE If you click on Cancel all the input value will be deleted x System type OS Installation path Windows I Apply Service Pack ress5800 120Eh System Partition Create new partition 12288 MB 4095 999999MB C Use existing partitions C Create All Area I Convert File System to NTFS lt Back Cancel Hep When completing the specification of setup information the Save Setup Information dialog box will appear 8 Confirm that the Configuration Diskette check box is checked and input file name for the Setup File in File Name Save Setup Information j OK Eec eN aa x File Name Cancel 9 Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click OK Now Configuration Diskette has been created Configuration Diskette is used when you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Put a label and keep it where it will not be lost NOTE For the information on the contents of each specifying item refer to the Help If you want to modify the information file that already exists click Modify information files on Configuration Diskette Creator window Refer to the Help to modify the inf file Installing and Using Utilities
30. disable HostRAID and use it as the standard SATA If you replace a hard disk drive being used with HostRAID please replace the hard disk drive after power off of the system Be sure to check the PORT number of the hard disk drive to be replaced in ASMBE or ASM in advance To start the system from the created array be sure to create a bootable array See Chapter 4 Setting of Bootable in this manual If you do not create a bootable array the memory dump can not be collected when a trouble occurs SATA HostRAID does not support Migration of hard disk drive Migration lt Common NOTES gt In addition to driver installation ASMBE or ASM installation is mandatory for using HostRAID functions For the installation of ASMBE or ASM refer to the Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide or Adaptec Storage Manager respectively HostRAID does not permit the use of the standby hibernation mode of ACPI functions Use ASMBE or ASM to maintain HostRAID but do not use any other utilities Create at least one OS partition in the array you have created If the OS partition does not exist the Verify may be executed for the array at the system boot If the following messages are included in the application log or log generated by the ASMBE your RAID system operates normally Spare test failed for pool spare bus 2 ch 3 id 4 Test of all spares completed with 1 failures 5 54 Installing the Operating
31. to the floppy disk L Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks LJ Is the floppy disk write protected Place the write protect switch on the floppy disk to the Write enabled position Q Is the floppy disk formatted Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk Q Is BIOS configuration correct The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility lt Menus to check Main Floppy A Security Diskette Write Protect O Is the server in the Secure Mode In the Secure Mode write access to the floppy disk may be disabled To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility Fail to access to the CD ROM Q Is the CD ROM properly set in the CD ROM drive tray The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD ROM Make sure that the CD ROM is placed properly in the holder Q Is the CD ROM applicable to the server gt The CD ROM for Macintosh is not available for use Inserted the correct CD ROM but the message like the following is displayed The CD ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD ROM is inserted Please insert the correct CD ROM OK Q Is the data side of the CD ROM dirty or injured
32. utility NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the server Floppy Disk The following describes use of the floppy disk Floppy disk type The server uses 3 5 inch floppy disks You can use the following two types of 3 5 inch floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk double sided high density track type Stores data of 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk double sided double density track type Stores data of 720KB Shutter Catching hole Insertion direction indicator Head window Centering hub Centering hole Write protection High density media hole hole Tip aa n 2HD Write protection switch B 2 Other Precautions Notes on use The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Keep the following notes in mind to use it Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes Attach the label to the correct position Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball point pen Do not open the shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the floppy di
33. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Upgrading Your Server 9 27 Installation Take the following steps to install the CPU 1 Q 0 S S N See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Open the drive cover and logic cover Remove two screws securing the support arm Remove the support arm from the chassis Remove the processor duct from the chassis T Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU 8 Raise the locking lever on the socket IMPORTANT Open the lever until it stops The bar can be opened to approx 120 degrees 9 28 Upgrading Your Server 9 Aligning the pins of the CPU with the socket insert the CPU slowly and gently into the socket IMPORTANT m Be aware of CPU direction Pin layouts on two corners among four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion Confirm the pin mark and pin layout on the socket and insert the CPU correctly m The mother board has zero insertion force sockets If CPU does not drop easily into socket holes make sure lever is in the full open position Pin mark 10 Push the CPU lightly to the socket and push down the lever to secure the CPU Upgrading Your Server 9 29 Put the heat sink on CPU 11 NOTE Be aware of direction of heat sink see figure below
34. 000 rpm Ultra 320 8150 172F 73 2 GB 15 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 193 146 GB 15 000 rpm Ultra 320 lt SATA hard disk drive gt N8150 184 80 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA N8150 185 120 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA N8150 186 250 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA N8150 204 80 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA2 N8150 205 160 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA2 N8150 206 250 GB 7 200 rpm serial ATA2 m To make array configuration specify RAIDO RAID1 or RAIDS as the RAID level ZZZZZZ ZZZZ ZZ All drive slots may contain a hard disk drive approximately 25 4 mm 1 inch high The drive IDs are always assigned to hard disk drives as shown below SCSI IDO SCSI ID1 SCSI ID2 Po U E a Al Channel 1 Not used Channel 2 9 6 Upgrading Your Server The hard disk drive bays are connected to the SCSI connector on the mother board when the server is shipped To use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration reconnect the cable from the connector on the mother board to which the SCSI controller is connected to the disk array controller connector For the cable reconnection see Disk Array Controller A dummy block or tray is installed in the hard disk drive bays The purpose of a dummy block is to increase the cooling effect in the server Install a dummy block in slots not containing a hard disk drive Installation SCSI hot plug HDD model Take the followin
35. 126 SCSI Controller F 2 Installing Windows 2000 lt SATA Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SATA Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue m Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F 86 and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process pop up messages may appear This does not affect on system behavior Click YES and continue the installation Follow the message hereafter MO Device If you specify the
36. 2003 You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect NOTES If you click Cancel in Basic Information screen the screen will go back to select the OS Cancel exists only in Basic Information screen If you click OK in Role of Computer screen the setup automatically selects default value for the later specification to continue the installation 5 12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 12 Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver If you want to install the optional mass storage driver insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the installation NOTE This function requires mounting a floppy disk drive on your server 13 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive according to the message If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive Insert Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Agree Software License Agreement screen appears 14 Read the contents carefully and click I agree or press F8 if you do agree If you do not agree click I disagree or press F3 IMPORTANT m If you do not agree to this agreement the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003 will not be installed m If NetWare Gateway and Client Service is specified to install the window to specify the detai
37. 3 Click Update Driver 4 When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next 5 Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next 6 Click Have Disk 7 Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK 8 Specify the following driver and click Next Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 95 N8190 1 26 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically E 20 Installing Windows Server 2003 Installing Disk Array Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F To additionally install the N8103 80F 81F in a system containing Windows Server 2003 connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver lt In the case of use of Windows Server 2003 SevicePack1 or Windows Server 2003 R2 gt 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320 1 2 which Device
38. 6 Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives 0 c csccescsssceseceeceseceecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeneenaees F 7 Updating the System Installing Service Pack ccecceceesecsseeseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeereneeenteensees F 9 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ccsccesccsseeseessesseeeseeeeceeeceeceseenseceaeeeeceeeeeeneeees F 10 PROSE erore vacated EE EE EEEE EE OE N AE E E REEE F 10 Network DIVO ro sie E E R E O E EA E E R teas F 11 Re install the NetWork Driver erorri eE REON E E RR EO E F 12 Graphics Accelerator Driveri reier oa Ea EER E E R EE F 13 USB 20 DVE aer E E O S sas E A E O O N F 13 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F 75 esesssssssesssesssssesssrserssesersrsseesessreerssesees F 14 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 ccecccceseessesecsseeseeseeseeteeseeses F 14 Installing RAID Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F ccccceesceeseeseceeeceeeeseceeeceeeseeeseeneeenes F 15 Setting for Collecting Memory Dump Debug Information ceeceeseeeseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees F 16 Appendix G Product Configuration Record Table c c seeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneees G 1 Hard ware eienenn n eR ceeg cece dan EERE a stb cvageten soled ERE T G 1 RO 12 0 ee ol oe eo G 3 Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of the server 1 2 Notes on Using Your Server WARNING LABELS Th
39. Adaptec Configuration Utility do not need to be run unless you want to change the password or security features add certain types of option boards or devices or upgrade your system board This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that are set by jumpers on the system board However these parameters do not usually require change SYSTEM BIOS SETUP The SETUP utility is used to change system configuration parameters This utility is pre installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions Thus you don t need to use the SETUP utility in most cases However you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below IMPORTANT m The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only m The SETUP utility allows you to set a password The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters of the SETUP utility With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited Do not set any password before installing the OS m The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility Dialog boxes appear on your SETUP utility thus may differ from descriptions in this manual If you find anything unclear see the online help or ask your se
40. CPU and heat sink 12 Backplane General Description 2 9 Mother Board eE 13 1 13 2 o ip array rey FRONT REAR 12 11 10 khODN ou 11 12 13 14 15 Main power connector Lithium battery CMOS clear jumper switch Hard disk drive access LED pin header Connect the LED relay cable of an additional SCSI RAID controller Remote management card socket SCSI 2 connector for SCSI hard disk drives Exclusively used with connector of external SCSI device SCSI 1 connector not used in this system 1 SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model only Password clear jumper switch Connectors for external device PCl riser card slot For full height boards 133 MHz 64 bit 3 3V PCI X PCI riser slot For only low profile boards 66MHz 64 bit 3 3V PCI X DIMM sockets for the interleave type The sockets are called 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 sequentially from top Processor sockets 13 1 Processor 1 CPU 1 13 2 Processor 2 CPU 2 Redundant fan jumper switch SATA connector 2 10 General Description STATUS INDICATORS This section explains the indication and meanings of the server LEDs ST POWER LED The POWER LED is on green while the server power switch is on It is off while no power is supplied to
41. Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to the server m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition m Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section contact your service representative IMPORTANT Before installing the operating system adjust the system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 for detail This chapter also includes information on configuring the HostRAID drive used with the onboard serial ATA interface Refer to the end of this chapter for detail 5 2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About Express Setup Express Setup helps you to install the Windows Operating System The setup automatically configures the RAID system and installs the Operating System and some management software IMPORTANT Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the hard disk drive You can also use Configuration disk at Express Setup in order to save or backup parameters for installation The Configuration disk is able to have some para
42. Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan Keep this User s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary SAFETY INDICATIONS Follow the instructions in this User s Guide for your safety to use the server The server contains components with possible danger hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings and preventive actions against such hazards Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as described in this User s Guide In the User s Guide or warning labels WARNING or CAUTION is used to indicate a degree of danger These terms are defined as follows A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury if the instruction is ignored A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury including burns or property damage if the instruction is ignored Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols The individual symbols are defined as follows This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard if the instruction is ignored An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type Attention S This symbol indicates prohibited actions An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited action Prohibited Action This symbol indicates mandatory actions An image in the symbo
43. Connecting Power Cord saie 2 cso st Riek eetaceestevssegcvestur coud a a E eE EER EE STERE 3 18 Turning On the Server 0 2225 elt tet d ee E E E EE teats Dos ted tie Ne 3 20 Installing Operating Syste EEE E E E E 3 22 Eaa ETELE AE E EEE E E E E S E 3 22 Making Backup Copies of System Information ssssssesseeseesesseeessstseesersststesessesetsesseenesseeresse 3 22 vi Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server ccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneeenseeeeeenseeeeeenees 4 1 System BIOS SET UP sestcvsveasectecevsnunts Gochatgcasbinseeaseasneusees dececkatteasahts devaes aa vensseekcesdubetuehtnaevans eins 4 1 Starting SETUP Utility nsaan nad eE a e ET E a E oe Mean heh Wace 4 2 Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage c cccceessessceseceseceeeeseceecaeeeaeeeeeeneeeereneens 4 3 Menu and Parameter Descriptions cscceseeseesseeseeeseeseceecesecesecesecaecnsecseecaeeeaeeeaeeneeeeeeserens 4 4 Configuring Mother Board Jumpers ccsccesccecceseceseeeseceeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeecenseceseeeseeaecnseceeeeeenes 4 19 SCS BIOS SCSIS leCt int cated Bac ane beeen uh oa tee Aa Me A oats 4 21 Using SCSISelect Utility o 0 5 ssn ns Ae aaea Ra header nietin RAR SG 4 21 Configuring SCSI Controller on Mother Board ccccceccesseesseeceeeceeeceesceeceecesecsaeeneeeneeenes 4 21 Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board cccceecseescesseesceesceeeceeeceeceaeenseeneeeneeenes 4 27 RAID BIOS
44. Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 4 The Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu point to Control Panel and click Intel R PROSet Wired The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu point to Settings and click Control Panel 2 Double click Intel R PROSet Wired on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB Click Apply and click OK Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection Installing Windows Server 2003 E 17 NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is val
45. Control Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Run the operating system Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Master Control Menu will appear Click on Setup with left mouse button and click Make OEM DISK and then for Windows 2000 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely F 6 Installing Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows 2000 1 Turn on the system power 2 Insert the Windows 2000 CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary The Windows 2000 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again 4 Ifthe RAID controller including embedded HostRAID feature or SCSI controller is installed in th
46. Do not operate the system until confirming that the additionally Make sure to use the CPU authorized by NEC Installing a third party CPU may cause a failure of the CPU as well as the server Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged Processor 1 Processor 2 FRONT o de o E T nit ti ii i REAR Mother board NOTE If the different revision of the processor is installed in the multiprocessor system Windows logs the following information every startup If this message is logged it is no problem for operation Event Date Time 1338 Type Information Event ID User N A Computer SERVER 1 Description an 7 3 2001 Source Application Popup Category None the least capable processor in the sy Data Bytes C Worde The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revisior Touse ll processore the operating system otis Rea lo the free this system contact the CPU rae are eae ve el processors ie supported 0000 0008 0010 0018 00 00 00 00 01 00 a4 00 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 oz 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 o0 o0 00 00 90 o0 00 00 0020
47. EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS Based with Local Console This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with local console Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER IMPORTANT Do not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM supplied with your server into the CD ROM drive of your server 3 Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty 4 Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu Express Setup Installing and Using Utilities 6 5 Express Setup Express Setup is intended for initial setup of the server Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration The program loads the utilities and drivers applies RAID settings partitions the disk and installs the desired operating system If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 after a few tasks are completed all that remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and install the Windows CD ROM input a product ID number and acknowledge
48. IDE Slave Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Slave Serial ATA Channel 0 Master Serial ATA Channel 1 Master Correspondence between the menu items and devices m Primary IDE Master ATA hard disk drive 1 option m Primary IDE Slave ATA hard disk drive 2 option m Secondary IDE Master CD ROM drive standard m Secondary IDE Slave None m Serial ATA Channel 0 Master Serial ATA hard disk drive 1 option m Serial ATA Channel 1 Master Serial ATA hard disk drive 2 option Option Parameter Description Your Setting Type None Selects the type of device attached to User the IDE or serial ATA channel It is Auto strongly recommended to keep the CD ROM factory setting Auto The following options do not appear when None or Auto are selected for Type Multi Sector Disabled Specifies the number of sectors that Transfers 2 Sectors are transferred per block during 4 Sectors multiple sector transfers 8 Sectors 16 Sectors LBA Mode Control Enabled Enable disable LBA instead of Disabled cylinder head sector addressing Transfer Mode Standard Select the method for moving data Fast PIO 1 to from the drive Fast PIO 2 Fast PIO 3 Fast PIO 4 FPIO 3 DMA1 FPIO 4 DMA2 Ultra DMA Disabled Select the Ultra DMA mode used for Mode 0 moving data to from the drive Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 7 Processor Settings
49. IMPORTANT Back up the data on an array before you delete it Otherwise all data on the array is lost Deleted arrays cannot be restored From the main menu select Manage Arrays and press Enter A list of RAID drives that configure the array is displayed Configuring Your Server 4 53 To delete an array 1 Select the array you wish to delete and press Delete 2 Select Delete on Array Properties dialog box and press Enter Array 00 sysrai Type RAID O Array Size 149GB Stripe Size 64KB Array Status OPTIAAE 00 Maxtor 6Y120M0 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 CDelete The confirmation prompt is displayed NOTE The number and contents depends on RAID level 3 Press Y to delete the array or partition or N to return to the previous menu 4 Press Esc to return to the previous menu Initializing Hard Disk Drive Hard disk drives must be initialized before they can be used as RAID drive An uninitialized disk does not appear in the disk selection list for creating a new array or it appears grayed out IMPORTANT m Initializing a disk overwrites the partition table on the disk and makes any data on the disk inaccessible m If the drive that has been used in an array is initialized you may not be able to return the disk to the original array again m Do not initialize a disk that is part of a boot array The system will fail to start 4 54 Configuring Your Server To initialize hard disk
50. IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter SATA Model A list of mass storage devices is displayed SCSI Model Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards WinXP Server 2003 A 32 and press Enter E 8 10 11 12 13 Installing Windows Server 2003 Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1 02 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SCSI is installed Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SATA is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 1 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 80F board is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Adaptec I20 RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000 XP 2003 When N8103 86 board is installed Continue performing tasks according to t
51. If the update processing is discontinued the system becomes unable to start Initialize Remote Management Card Initialize Remote Management Card is used to configure the Remote Management Card with correct parameters of the system installed it System Management The parameters of BMC Baseboard Management Controller are set for remote control and alert Help Displays explanations about various functions of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Return to the Top Menu Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu Installing and Using Utilities 6 9 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with remote console NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set up the server from the management workstation management PC via the network or the server s COM B serial port IMPORTANT Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server or on any other server obtained without the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Doing so may cause a failure of the server m When a keyboard is connected to the server the remote console feature is disabled The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console Nothing is displayed on the management PC m If you fail to configure the disk array controller N8103 80F or 81F from the remote console try again using the server console m The sy
52. Manager lists Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations and check the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next Copying of the driver is completed and the Completing the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box below appears Click Finish lt In the case of Windows Server 2003 which has not installed SevicePack1 gt 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu gt Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations and check the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next Copying of the driver is completed and the Completing the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box below appears Click Finish Installing Windows Server 2003 E 21 About Windows Activ
53. PROSet Wired on the Control Panel dialog box The Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box appears Put the mouse cursor on Intel R PRO 1000 MT Dual Port Network Connection in the list and right click Pull down menu appears Select Add to Team gt and then click Create New Team The Teaming Wizard dialog box appears Select Adapter Fault Tolerance or Adaptive Load Balancing and click Next Check the adapter to join the team and click Next Click Finish The setup will go back to Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box so click OK Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 17 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK Specify the foll
54. PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run PROSET EXE in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT DOTNET BCS5 PROSET WS03XP32 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish O 0 No oroe Restart the system E 16 Installing Windows Server 2003 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Control Panel Click Network Connections and Click Local Area Connection The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network
55. R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2003 On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative BIOS Settings Before installing Windows Server 2003 confirm if the BIOS settings are correct See Chapter 4 to confirm the settings NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO A gent requires to install the necras sys driver on your Windows system If you install the Windows without using the Express Setup run the Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu 5 4 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Exceptional setup and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 lt SCSI Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch N8103 86 Disk Array Controller Och Adaptec HostRAID SCSI Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 S
56. ROM out of the server if any Power off the server the POWER SLEEP LED goes off Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Remove all the cables from the server oe Oe Hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons to carry the server IMPORTANT Do not hold the front door to lift the server The front door may be disengaged from the server causing personal injury 6 Protect the server with the shock absorbing materials and pack it securely 7 12 Maintenance This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 8 Troubleshooting If your server does not operate as expected read this chapter before assuming a failure NOTE For provision against an unexpected failure it is recommended to install the maintenance utility NEC ESMPRO to the server and client computers 8 2 Troubleshooting SYSTEM VIEWERS Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager Example NEC ESMPRO Manager i Nerviener He vou mos tab ape U sd i ee ae ieee I n HOT IRT IODD O2J13120000309PM oo 5 allele xde 212 Tass ar ioaz ozosianoosospn Srna
57. Server m Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server Some non supported devices may be physically installed connected but cause failures of the server as well as a malfunctions of the server m NEC recommends you use NEC s genuine products Some third party products claim that they support the server However repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulted from use of such third party products will be charged TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY The following must be observed when you transfer or sell the server or software provided with the server to a third party Server Make sure to provide this User s Guide along with the server to a third party Provided Software To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party the following requirements must be satisfied m All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained m Transfer requirements listed in Software License Agreement that comes with each software application must be satisfied m Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server Notes on Using Your Server 1 13 DISPOSAL AND CONSUMABLES m Dispose the server all the internal devices floppy disks and CD ROMs according to all national laws and regulations IMPORTANT For disposal or replacement of the battery on the mother board of the server consult
58. Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ec ceceescesceseeeteceeenseeneeeneeenes D 1 Updating Systemics ketone tied Bu od OK NAA Akon ROAM Weed D 2 Re installing to the Hard disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk D 2 Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection cccecccscccssessceesceeseeesceeeesceseceseceaecaecseecaeeeseeensenseeeeeees D 2 MO DEVICE Zenta eaa e a Coit e eas et ee ees ces e eS EOE a tad aati as D 3 PAartitiOin S126 ETENEE TE ay tabt nua sscviedbetossbectansacioutin D 3 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions c ccescsseesseesseeseeeeeeeeeeeceeseceeeenseenaeesecsaeeaeenaes D 4 Creating Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER D 4 Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation cccceeceesceeseceseceseeseeceeeseeneeeaeeenes D 6 Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives cccccsccescssecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesecessenseenaeenaes D 8 Updating the System a ee a a E a aa Aaa ER E a D 10 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings cccccesccesscesecesecssecseeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeneeeeensees D 11 PROSEb A EEE EE A daeass ea uadtars rest E EE D 11 Network Driver s in irnn aeee ta E E E EEROR R aE D 12 Optional Network Board Driver sessesseesersessessseeressesetsrestestsstsressessestsseesessreresseseseeseese D 13 Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT Adaptive Load Balancing ALB
59. System with Express Setup SCSI HostRAID Setup Flow The flowchart below shows the SCSI HostRAID system setup procedure Start i Is SCSI HostRAID used as boot disk Enable the SCSI HostRAID feature and create RAID by using SCSISelect Utility Refer to SCSISelect Utility User s Manual 1 Install driver install OS See Appendix D or E of y this guide Update system See this chapter Install ASMBE or ASM See ASMBE ASM User s y Guide Install Standby Hibernation Lock driver See appendix of ASMBE ASM User s Guide 2 l End 1 You can create RAID by using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER In this case only you need to do is to set the SCSI HostRAID feature to Enabled by using SCSISelect Utility 2 For Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Adaptec Storage Manager User s Guide For Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide You may view or print these documents from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 55 SATA HostRAID Setup Flow The flowchart below shows the SATA HostRAID system setup procedure Is HostRA boot D used as disk Yes AA Enable the HostRAID feature and create RAID by using BIOS Setup Utility AA Install driver install OS v See Appendix D or E of this guide Update system See this chapter Inst
60. When more than two Network adapter are specified the detailed specification of TCP IP protocol are all set to use DHCP When more than two Network adapter are specified the detailed specification of the protocol may all be set by default value Re specify the details from Control Panel Not more than two Network adapter is connected but the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default e g Specified IP Address on TCP IP but DHCP is specified Are you specifying more than two protocols In this case the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network adapter so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default Re specify the details from Control Panel after starting the OS Troubleshooting 8 25 The following message appears on the screen and the setup is suspended while the Express Setup is executing Bad Command or filename Insufficient disk space Follow the procedure described below and check the BIOS settings for the SCSI controller As for the procedure on the SCSI controller which is not described in this User s Guide refer to the manual accompanied with the controller and check the setting for Int13 Extensions lt In case the SCSI Controller is AIC 7892 gt 1 Press Ctrl A when POST displays AIC 7892 2 Select Configure View Host Adapter Settings 3 Select Advanced Configuration Options and press Enter 4 Change the setting of BIOS Support f
61. a current list of approved memory modules 2 18 General Description PCI Riser Slots The mother board has two PCI riser slots Riser B provides the following features m Bus speed up to 133 MHz m 184 pin 5 volt keyed 64 bit expansion slot connector m Support for a 1 slot PCI riser card m Support for both full length and low profile PCI cards Riser C provides the following features Bus speed up to 66MHz m 184 pin 5 volt keyed 64 bit expansion slot connector m Support for a 1 slot PCI riser card m Support for only low profile PCI cards Video The mother board uses an ATI RADEON 7000 PCI graphics accelerator with 16 MB of video SDRAM The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports m Resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 under 2D and 1024 x 768 under 3D m CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate The mother board supports disabling of the onboard video through the BIOS setup menu or when a plug in video card is installed in any of the PCI slots SCSI Controller The SCSI version of the server board includes an embedded Adaptec AIC 7902 controller providing dual Ultra320 Low Voltage Differential LVD SCSI channels The SCSI bus is terminated on the server board with active terminators that cannot be disabled The onboard device must always be at one end of the bus The device at the other end of the cable must also be terminated LVD devices generally do not have termination built in and need to have a termination so
62. a single person More than one person is required to install parts including the doors and trays for the rack Failure to follow this instruction may cause some parts to fall to be broken and or to result in personal injury Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Always pull out a device from the rack in the state that the rack is made stable by the installation of stabilizers or earthquake resistant construction Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Pulling out more than one device from the rack may cause the rack to be fallen Only pull out a single device from the rack at a time Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power supply To prevent burns fires and device damages the power supplied to the power supply in the rack shall not exceed the rating load of the power branch circuit Contact your electric constructor or the local power company for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities Notes on Using Your Server 1 7 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection A WARNING Disconnect the power cord s before installing or removing the server Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power cord s from a power outlet before installing removing the server All voltage is removed only when the power cords are unplugged A CAUTION gt Never attempt to lift
63. aes b eared E pended oes ea ele cae eee eee ae ee ees eA eles i About This User s Guide seracn prenien iiio a E R EE A E ER ERER ii Inthe Package ses 2c i038 Sis Sess E E E E i ines ese ee EE iii Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server ssssusssssuunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 1 1 Warning Labels c2 cc 06 nai ed ain oe RARER AR RS CAE RA re We BRR Rt 1 2 Dalety NOteS izes cleats estes A E t aC cade ue St A T E dae cae soak 1 3 Grenier E tice Sees E E ik Osten coins A ek toate alten Mate aaa ed ree 1 3 Power Supply and Power Cord UsSe c ccsccescsssecsseeseeeseesseeeceecnsecnseceaecneecaeecaeeeaeeeneeneeenseneees 1 5 1A 6 a eee 1 6 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection ccccesceeseeesceseceeeeseceeceeeseeeeeeneeeeseeerees 1 7 Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices ccecceeseescessceseceeceseceecaeecaeeeaeeeaeeneeeereneeens 1 9 During Operation e a a a a og douipsasacvaabigdneedoosoaseah ip ducubensueteatagees 1 10 For Proper Operationer an e a a e p e e aar aa a A ase e 1 11 Transfer t Third Party enccerin ancore i ani E E EA EA T REE EAS 1 12 Disposal and Consumables 22 s0 2 ccccccscecicedeccscevaneelivececctceesstentescecstcesdedunavadectecsnceiee cetdecdecsteetentes 1 13 User SUppOrt i raini iie oE E reeaedde E as Wea eas tele areas Ma ete 1 14 Chapter 2 General Description nccicccc cs cece cccceveesesttcdececeevenseetctnee cece eessertecbeeenes nnmnnn nnmnnn ene 2 1 OVENI E
64. and UN SWITCH OUT They may be called OUTPUT and OUTPUT2 To control power supply with an application NEC ESMPRO UPSController that controls the UPS connect the power cord to an SWITCH OUT outlet For constant power supply connect the power cord to a UN SWITCH OUT outlet Connect the modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet lt Example gt When the power cord from the server to a UPS change the BIOS setup of the server to link with power supply from the UPS To power on the server from the UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply select Server AC LINK Power On Change a parameter for AC LINK under the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP utility See Chapter 4 for details 3 20 Setting Up Your Server TURNING ON THE SERVER Turn on the server and follow the on screen instructions for setup IMPORTANT Before turning on the server Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before installation Ifthe server has a PCI board with the PCI to PCI bridge installed the SETUP utility is enabled to launch Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires pre installation setups before actually installing the board Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices require setups before proceeding to the next step To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic board install a desired OS to the ser
65. are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 49 Updating the System Installing Service Pack IMPORTANT This system does not support Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 3 If you install Windows 2000 CD ROM which contains Service Pack 4 to your system you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again Update the system in the situation below m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority e g Administrator and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Setup in Master Control Menu screen appears so left click the item Click Update the System from the menu and the setup will start After that follow the message to continue the setup process and apply Service Pack Making Backup Copies of System Information The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Selec
66. available if you edit Boot ini File For the available switch options refer to the following information m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 170756 Available Switch Options for the Windows NT Boot ini File If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing adding PAE switch in Boot ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory However the Microsoft operating system products which support PAE switch option are limited Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 291988 A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch Below is the example on how to add PAE switch to Boot ini file 1 Click Start point to Programs point to Accessories and then click Notepad 2 On the File menu click Open 3 Inthe Open dialog box in the Look in drop down list box click systemroot drive 4 Inthe Open dialog box in the Files of type drop down list box click All Files and in the File name drop down list box enter Boot ini And then click Open The content of Boot ini file will be displayed 5 Add PAE to Operating Systems section in Boot ini file and then save it lt Example of Boot ini file gt boot loader timeout 30 default multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINNT operating systems multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0
67. back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run PROSET EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM DriveLetter gt WINNT DOTNET BCS PROSET WS03XP32 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish Po eo Oy a i Restart the system 5 14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Driver Specify the details of network driver One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears The procedure in the case of th
68. board installation Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack SPOS gt See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal as described in Chapter 9 of this guide to prepare Remove the logic cover Locate the position of the jumpers on the mother board you are changing For clearing the BIOS password remove the jumper strap on the BIOS password clear jumper For Clearing the CMOS move the jumper strap to the CMOS clear position Refer to the previous illustration to find the location of the jumper Wait for a while about 5 seconds and then reinstall the jumper block to the default position Reinstall the server removed in Step 2 Plug the power cord to your server and turn on the server Press F2 at the prompt to run the BIOS SETUP utility and select Load Setup Defaults at the Exit menu IMPORTANT If the onboard SATA RAID feature is used in the SATA hard disk drive model change the parameter of the SATA RAID Enable in the Advanced menu from Disable to Enable Configuring Your Server 4 21 SCSI BIOS SCSISelect The SCSISelect utility is provided to configure the SCSI controller on the mother board or the SCSI controller on an optional board This utility m
69. cord cord Replace a damaged power m Do not place any object on the cord with a new one of the same power cord specifications Ask your service m Do not bundle power cords representative for replacement Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and to use with the server and its safety has been tested Do not use the attached power cord for any other purpose Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock 1 6 Notes on Using Your Server Rack A CAUTION Do not carry or install the server only by a single person More than one person is required to carry or install the rack Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury and or breakages of surrounding devices In particular a high rack such as 44U rack is unstable if it is not fixed by stabilizers More than one person must always carry or install the rack while they support it Do not install the server so that the load may be concentrated on a specific point Install stabilizers on the rack so that the total load of the rack and devices mounted on the rack is not concentrated on a singe point or join more than one rack with each other to distribute the load Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury Do not install components on the server only by
70. device compliant with the USB interface to the connectors DUMP NMI switch Press this switch to dump system memory POWER switch Press this switch to turn on off the power Pressing the switch once turns on the power and the POWER LED goes on Pressing it again turns off the power Keep pressing the switch for 4 seconds or more forcibly turns off the power UID Unit ID switch Press this switch to turn on off the UID LEDs on the front and rear panels of the server Pressing the switch once turns on the LEDs Pressing it again turns them off Optical disk drive CD ROM drive This drive reads data from the CD ROM 7 1 Disk access LED 7 2 CD tray eject button 7 3 Emergency hole 3 5 inch floppy disk drive This drive reads writes data from to the 3 5 inch floppy disk 8 1 Disk access LED 8 2 Disk slot 8 3 Eject button Hard disk drive bays Mount SCSI hard disk drives in the bays Each number following the bold faced number indicates the SCSI ID In the standard configuration the hard disk drive trays are mounted in all the bays DISK LED green amber Hard disk drive LED Each hard disk drive LED is green during access to the hard disk drive The LED turns amber when the hard disk drive fails The LED flashes switching back and forth between green and amber during build processing in only disk array configuration SATA hard disk drive bays Mount SATA hard disk drives in the bay The left side bay is connected to channel 1 of the SA
71. devices is not guaranteed 8 12 Troubleshooting Fail to access to internal or external devices or such devices fail to operate Q Are cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected Also make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order Q Is the power on order correct When the server has any external devices connected power on the external devices first then the server Q Did you install drivers for connected optional devices Some optional devices require specific device drivers Refer to the manual that comes with the device to install its driver Q Is BIOS configuration correct When the server has PCI devices connected make sure to set the PCI device interrupt and others with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Most PCI devices generally do not require any change to the configuration but some boards do require specific settings Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration PCI Slot xx ROM x PCI slot number gt Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I O port address or operation mode settings Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings lt Menu to check Advanced Peripheral Configuration gt The POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled O Is the serv
72. drive Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information There are some errors on the specified setup information Follow the instruction to input the correct value It is not necessary to cancel the installation On Windows 2000 you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the setup Complete appears on the Role of Computer screen Ifyou click Complete here the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the later specification to continue the process lt The Default Value gt The specification of network protocol Protocol TCP IP DHCP Specified Service Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer Client Microsoft network client Component SNMP IIS Excluding Windows Server 2003 Application NEC ESMPRO Agent Power Console Plus if optional RAID controller is installed in the system Adaptec Storage Manager When using HostRAID Troubleshooting 8 23 The following error log is included in the event log while operating the system Event ID 16 Source iANSMiniport Type Error Category None Description Team 0 The last adapter has lost link Network connection has been lost Though the above error is included in the event log when specifying the teaming the LAN driver can work properly Complete does not appear on Role of Computer screen The Complete does not appear if the Setup File that has already been created is loaded
73. drive being connected to the onboard SCSI connector as a RAID drive by using the SCSISelect Utility NOTE The factory set value is to use the hard disk drive as a single disk drive To change settings by SCS Select Utility 1 Start the SCSISelect Utility AIC 7902 A at Slot 23 02 03 00 AIC 7902 B at Slot 23 02 03 01 2 Select the channel to set HostRAID to open the Options window 3 Select Configure View SCSI Controller Settings and press Enter Configure View SCSI Controller Settings SCSI Disk Utilities Configuring Your Server 4 31 4 Select Disabled of Host RAID on Configuration menu and press Enter L Inte SCSI Controller 1D SCSI Controller Parity Enabled SCSI Controller Terminati Enabled ions Boot Device Configuration Press lt Enter gt SCSI Device Configuration Press lt Enter gt Advanced Configuration Press lt Enter gt Host RAID Disabled InterruptCIRQ Channel 1 0 Port Addresses 2000h SCSI Controller ID SCSI Controller Parity Enabled SCSI Controller Termination Enabled Additional Options Boot Device Conf Press lt Enter gt SCSI Device Conf s Press lt Enter gt Advanced Configu Disabled Sasra Pross KENST Disabled Host RAID Info Interrupt IRQ Channel 1 0 Port Addresses 2400h 2000h 6 Press Esc The confirmation message Save Changes Mode appears Select Yes 7 Press Esc to return to the Optio
74. drives 1 Start the ACU See Running the Array Configuration Utility ACU described earlier 2 From the Options menu select Array Configuration Utility and press Enter Controll Array Configuration Utility Disk Utility 3 Select Initialize Drives from the main menu and press Enter Main Menu anage Arrays reate Array dd Deleate Hostspare nitialize Drives Use the cursor keys to select the hard disk drive you wish to initialize and press Insert Repeat Step 4 so that both drives to be initialized are selected Press Enter NONA Read the warning message and ensure that you have selected the correct disk drives to initialize Type Y to continue Configuring Your Server 4 55 Using the Disk Utilities The Disk Utilities enable you to low level format or verify the media of your Serial ATA hard disk drives To access the disk utilities 1 Start the ACU See Running the Array Configuration Utility ACU described earlier 2 From the Options menu select Disk Utilities using the cursor key and press Enter Array Configuration Utility Disk Utilitiy 3 Select the desired hard disk drive and press Enter SATA Port 0 Maxtor 6Y120M0 YAR51EWO SATA Port 1 Maxtor 6Y120M0 YAR51EWO Only drives present at Post are displayed 4 56 Configuring Your Server 4 Select the desired menu to execute and press Enter SATA Port 0 Maxtor 6Y120M0 YAR51EWO SATA Port 1 Maxtor 6Y120M0 YAR
75. drives and enclosure monitoring The transport mechanism for the standardized alert detection and status reporting is the SCSI bus Disk drives power supplies cooling fans and temperature are continually monitored and the conditions then reported over the SCSI bus to the system When used with RAID management software the user can be alerted of impending or imminent disk conditions requiring attention This allows the user to react to conditions that could normally go unnoticed until data loss SYSTEM BOARD FEATURES The following subsections describe the system board major components Processor The system board accommodates one or two 64 bit Intel Xeon processors with 1MB 2MB cache in the FC mPGA4 socket package This processor uses the 90 nano technology and offers advanced performance Memory The system board contains six 240 pin DIMM slots each supporting 72 bit ECC 64 bit main memory plus ECC registered SDRAM DIMMs DDR2 400 compatible Memory is two way interleaved and partitioned in three groups You may install a minimum of 1 GB 512 MB x 2 and as much as 16 GB The controller automatically detects sizes and initializes the memory array depending on the type size and speed of the installed DIMMs and reports memory size and allocation to the server via configuration registers NOTE Use DIMMs that have been tested for compatibility with the server board Contact your sales representative or dealer for
76. drives to the 3 5 inch disk bays IMPORTANT m To open the front door you must unlock the door with the provided security key m Pay attention not to press the POWER switch when you install or remove the front bezel Installing or Removing the Front Bezel When turning the power of the server on off accessing to the floppy disk drive or CD ROM drive or installing or removing a hard disk drive on or from the 3 5 inch disk bay first remove the front bezel IMPORTANT The front bezel can be opened only when you unlock it by using the attached security key 1 Insert the attached security key into the key slot and turn the key to the front bezel side with it pressed lightly to release the lock A a af Unlock Lock 2 Hold the right end of the front bezel lightly to pull it toward you 2 30 General Description 3 Slide the front bezel to the left a little to remove the tab from the frame and then remove the front bezel from the server To install the front bezel latch the tab at the left side of the front bezel on the server frame After the installation lock the front bezel by using the key for security Tab General Description 2 31 POWER Switch Use the POWER switch to turn on off the server Power On Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis The POWER LED lights in green POWER LED POWER switch
77. ean ae nein mean 9 20 Logic COVE finere iE E EE RRE E E E sede de E RE 9 21 DIMM aoon rE EEEREN E EUN erin E RA GS 9 22 Processor CRU vecccscecccescesedes aie i a E REE E A A EEE tatesete 9 26 PCI Board ionni ienie i a E EEE E EEEIEE A E RANT E EE EREE 9 33 RAID Controller Boatado cnie ees ssosecay suseotevs tes EEE E EEE 9 38 Redundant Hot Swap fan SCSI Hard Disk Drive Model Only 9 45 Remote Management Card RMC ccsccssssssecssecsseeseeeseeseceeensecnsecaecaecnaecaeeaeenseenaeeneeenes 9 49 Appendix A Specifications ec cccccecececeeeee cece eeeeee sence sees ensenneeeaeeeceeeeeseasecaneeseeeeeeeneees A 1 Appendix B Other Precautions ccesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeseeeeseseeneeeeeeeneees B 1 Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller cceccecccseesseeceesceeeceeeeeeeceecnseeeseeneeneenaees B 1 Server Management Software icssc seca scicteaecheiictities eat Ma Hansa ed ee a B 1 Floppy DISkez ossdeciecs hehe tes N e te Hs BEA ae eee OG RE E B 1 CDROM aeeoe i hi een vee eee hte etaohie ae i EE O EA E E E R EREE B 4 Tape Medidor a EEN ET e en E eee Lee B 4 Keyboard area E N E ee RE ee en see a B 5 MOUSE aino a iiai E eee EE aves A EE ET E Meas R E O a E aE B 6 Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions cccsesseeeseseeeeeeeeeees D 1 Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions cccccsseesseessessceeseeeeceeeeeseceseensecseeeneeenes D 1 Optional Board
78. edd E aoe E ee 2 17 PCLRiser Sloinne nn a RE ek aa dete ariel ei taeda eevee ad 2 18 VideO seta E e RE ete earn al a eis eee ed vewlal apa aed 2 18 SCSI Conitrollet sick scbseicut cteeciteiieiseceehsheaena eetbes E AE E EE O A A E E e i 2 18 Network Controllerssrrennec eiinoeoooe A E O E EE R E R a a 2 19 Keyboard atid Mouse ere n e E NE EE als Se eens Rese es 2 20 ACB E EE E A A E T E A A E E S A A 2 20 Remote Management Card RMC ccccccesscesecssecseeeseeeseeseeeeeceseensecaeesaecnaecsaeaecaeceeeneeenes 2 21 Degradation Feature nea eo a E Seen ok esheets aed Soe is de E A E de aes 2 22 Remote Power On Feature Wake On LAN ccccsssssssesecesecseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeceseenaeeaecaecseecseeenes 2 22 AC pink PG ature nense eene a iovocestecu eas E EE EE a TR R A E E eae 2 22 SYSTEMS CCUPILY AEE NEE OENES E A E E NE Saat 2 23 Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring s sssesssesesssreessssserseeseeerssreressesersreseesessee 2 23 Software Locks via the BIOS Setup Utility ccc eececcsseceseceseceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeesereseeneeseeeeerens 2 23 NEC EXPRESSBUIEDER ss0sc3 lasseysen esos tons vesvesacs a a Moxa vite hard a Guarentee 2 27 INEG ESMPRO Jaoob enera nena a ens veove eel Bas aeue ened eevee Meda a ae 2 28 Off line Maintenance Utility ia skh aa e dee lee dna iehak Gawd 2 28 System Diagnostic Wulity v 02 Laika buikleranaiiekwe dua aaa aaa raet 2 28 NEG DianaScope ice sectiadega hd iktie bias tiie whan die
79. for the server The total length of a cable including the connection cable in SCSI device is limited by the SCSI standard Ask your sales representative for details A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port connectors Secure the power cord s and interface cables with a tie wrap Form the cables in such a way that they will not come into contact with the door or the guide rails on the sides of the server Setting Up Your Server 3 17 Device with the serial interface e g Management PC USB device Device with the 2 Hub Device with the SOSI interface multiport repeater serial interface p S Finally connect the provided lt 2 100BASE T ji X 0 power cord to the receptacle 10 OOBASE TX If connecting the server to UPS 100BASE T 10BASE T see the explanation below 1000BASE TX 10BASE T 4 mt 2 a a o 00000 oce oO oclo Q e a Keyboard Mouse an ula l ET gd 7 eal USB device Display unit 141 Any USB keyboard and mouse are not supported 2 A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector The console of a management PC can be connected to only serial port 2 BIOS setup required 3 Use the provided branch cable 4 Connect the power cord to a circuit breaker of 15 A or less 5 S
80. front panel power switch remains depressed when secure mode is removed the server will be powered off General Description 2 25 Summary of Software Security Features The table below lists the software security features and describes what protection each offers In general to enable or set the features listed here you must run the BIOS Setup and go to the Security Subsystem Group menu The table also refers to the Setup utility Software Security Features Feature Description Secure mode How to enter secure mode e Setting and enabling passwords automatically places the system in secure mode e If you set a hot key combination through Setup you can secure the system simply by pressing the key combination This means you do not have to wait for the inactivity time out period When the system is in secure mode The server can boot and run the operating system but mouse and keyboard input is not accepted until the user password is entered At boot time if a CD is detected in the CD ROM drive or a diskette in drive A the system prompts for a password When the password is entered the server boots from CD or diskette and disables the secure mode If there is no CD in the CD ROM drive or diskette in drive A the server boots from drive C and automatically goes into secure mode All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time To leave secure mode Enter the correct password s Disable writing
81. hard disk drive 9 12 Upgrading Your Server 5 Ifusing the server with the hard disk drive removed install the dummy block in the empty slot 6 Install the front bezel you removed in step 2 When the hard disk drives are in the disk array configuration you can restore the state before an error using the auto rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk drive into a new one The auto rebuild feature is available for the RAID1 RAIDS or RAIDO10 disk array configuration Auto rebuild is carried out when you hot swap a failed hard disk drive with a new one replace the disk while the server is powered While auto rebuild is in progress the DISK LED flashes green and amber alternatively to indicate it IMPORTANT m When auto rebuild fails the DISK LED lights in amber Remove and install the hard disk drive again to restart auto rebuild m Ifthe disk array monitoring utility is installed it may display or act as follows If the DISK LED does not light in amber after auto rebuild however auto rebuild has completed successfully Displays Rebuild was cancelled on the screen while auto rebuild is in progress Appears to stop and restart auto rebuild Observe the following notes for auto rebuild m Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk drive error and completion of auto rebuild m When you removed a hard disk drive wait at least 90 seconds before ins
82. its CD ROM tray ejected Dust may enter the server through openings and cause malfunctions of the server Any person may also bump it and get injured Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server Turn off the cellular phone or pager Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server Notes on Using Your Server 1 11 FOR PROPER OPERATION Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server Use of the server ignoring the notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server Install the rack assembly in a place that meets requirements for successful operation For details see Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server The server is intended for installation in a Restricted Access Location mounted above a non combustible material Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server although it may appear on the OS Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and peripheral devices Verify that the access LED on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage changes When plugging the power cord to the system you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the POWER switch on the front panel This is normal system operation and is required by the server management logic Do not tur
83. mirroring When storing data onto one hard disk drive the same data is simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive When a hard disk drive becomes faulty the one with the same data can be used This provides operation without the system going down IMPORTANT m RAIDI reads or writes data to from the two hard disk drives at the same time The disk access performance is lower than the single disk Logical capacity of the array is equal to one hard disk drive connected Installing the Hard Disk Drives Install the two serial ATA hard disk drives to your server Refer to Chapter 9 for detail IMPORTANT Use two hard disk drives of the same revolution In addition use two hard disk drives of the same capacity if you are going to configure RAID1 Configuring Your Server 4 45 Enabling RAID Feature by BIOS SETUP Utility The two hard disk drives installed can be used either as a single disk or a RAID drive To configure a disk drives as RAID drive you must specify the hard disk drive being connected to the onboard SATA connector as a RAID drive by using the BIOS SETUP Utility NOTE The factory set value is to use the hard disk drive as a single disk drive To change settings by BIOS SETUP Utility 1 Start the BIOS SETUP utility See Starting SETUP Utility described earlier 2 Select Advanced gt SATA RAID Enable Enabled Advanced Security Server Item Specific Help gt Memory Con
84. multiprocessing server based on the Intel Xeon microprocessor It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology The combination of compute performance memory capacity and integrated I O provides a high performance environment for many server market applications These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such as file and print services e mail web access web site server etc Your server is housed and available as a rack mount system Your server conveniently installs into a standard EIA 19 inch rack assembly VOTE Wooo l Your server includes a 3 5 inch diskette drive a CD ROM drive and three SCSI or two SATA hard disk drive bays The hot swap SCSI hard disk drive bays support up to three 1 0 inch SCSI hard disk drives that can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down if RAID functionality is configured in the system As application requirements increase you can expand your server with an additional processor additional memory add in boards and peripheral devices tape devices CD ROM and hard disk drives General Description 2 3 External View The following figure shows the SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 1 Drive cover 2 Release buttons 3 Logic cover 2 4 General Description Front View with Front Bezel Closed The following figure
85. not been found appears select Yes to continue If the dialog message Direct X Ver 8 isn t installed appears select continue to continue Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system USB 2 0 Driver USB 2 0 Driver is pre installed When restoring the system or re installing the system the driver is automatically installed in the process of updating the system F 14 Installing Windows 2000 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F 75 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed
86. not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed Do not drop the CD ROM Do not place anything on the CD ROM or bend the CD ROM Do not attach any label onto the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the CD ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the CD ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Keep the CD ROM away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD ROM wipe the CD ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD ROM Do not use record spray cleaner benzene or thinner Keep the CD ROM in a CD ROM case when not in use If the CD ROM emits large noise in the CD ROM drive remove the CD ROM and insert it back again Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server This chapter describes how to set up the server appropriate for your system on a step by step basis 3 2 Setting Up Your Server SETUP FLOW Follow the flowchart below to set up the server Selecting the server site Select a suitable site for the server and assemble the 19 inch rack assembly Unpacking the system Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box
87. or disable the SCSI termination Termination Disabled Select Enabled Factory set Additional Options To set three menu items under Additional Options select a menu item with the cursor keys 4 or 1 and press Enter to display its submenu Then select a submenu item with the cursor keys or t and press Enter to fix the item Use the cursor keys or t for parameter selection Boot Device Configuration Move the cursor onto Boot Device Configuration and press Enter to display the submenu The Boot Device Configuration submenu allows you to select the device connected to the channel A or B as a boot device Always select AIC 7902 A 4 24 Configuring Your Server m SCSI Device Configuration Move the cursor onto SCSI Device Configuration and press Enter to display the submenu The following table lists submenu items available parameters and descriptions IMPORTANT Select a parameter for each submenu item on a per SCSIID basis Verify the SCSI ID of a desired device before configuration NOTE To find out the SCSI ID for the optional device connected select SCSI Disk Utilities on the Options menu and press Enter See SCSI Disk Utilities for detail Submenu item Parameter Description Sync Transfer Rate 320 33 3 Select 320 MB Sec 160 20 0 You may need to change the value 80 0 10 4 depending on your optional device 66 6 ASYN Refer to the manual that comes wit
88. personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details PO Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions Make sure to complete board installation Do not lift the server only by a single person Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed Do not install the server on the rack halfway pP Upgrading Your Server 9 3 ANTI STATIC MEASURES The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity Avoid failures caused by static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices Wear a wrist strap an arm belt or anti static glove Wear a wrist strap on your wrist If no wrist strap is available touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity Select a suitable work space Work with the server on the anti static or concrete floor When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated make sure take anti static measures beforehand Use a work table Place the server on an anti static mat to work with it Cloth Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server Wear anti static shoes to work with the server Take off any jewels a ring bracelet or wrist watch before working with the server Handling of com
89. select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations and check the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next Copying of the driver is completed and the Completing the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box below appears Click Finish SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP DEBUG INFORMATION Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003 This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003 Installation Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Exceptional setup and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 lt SCSI Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch N8103 86 Disk Arra
90. server operates only when at least two DIMMs are installed See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Open the logic cover Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM The DIMM is unlock and ready for removal S t Reinstall all parts removed in Step 2 Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 Start the SETUP and select Advanced Memory Configuration gt Memory Retest Enabled to clear the error information of the removed DIMM See Chapter 4 for details Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details 9 26 Upgrading Your Server Processor CPU The server may have another CPU installed in addition to the standard CPU Intel Xeon Processor IMPORTANT m The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the CPU Do not touch the CPU pins by a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier installed CPU is in normal state
91. still run The system board supports sleep states s0 s1 s4 and s5 m s0 Normal running state m sl Processor sleep state No context will be lost in this state and the processor caches will maintain coherency m s4 Hibernate or Save to Disk The memory and machine state are saved to disk Pressing the power button or other wakeup event will restore the system state from the disk and resume normal operation This assumes that no hardware changes have been made to the system while it was off m s5 Soft off Only the RTC section of the CSB and the BMC are running in this state No context is saved by the OS or hardware IMPORTANT The system is off only when the AC power cord is disconnected General Description 2 21 Remote Management Card RMC Server management is concentrated in the Remote Management Card RMC The RMC and associated circuitry are powered from a 5V DC standby voltage which remains active when system power is switched off but the ac power source is still on and connected The RMC supports the NEC DianaScope which allows remote server management through networks Events monitored by the manager system include over temperature and over voltage conditions fan failure or chassis intrusion Information on NEC DianaScope may be found in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM One major function of the RMC is to autonomously monitor system management events and log their occurrence in the nonvolatile System
92. the blank cover IMPORTANT Keep the removed blank cover for future use 4 Upgrading Your Server 9 15 Insert the power supply unit Gold plated connectors Grasp the handle and firmly push the power supply The power supply unit is locked when a distinct click is heard 9 16 Upgrading Your Server 6 Connect two power cords Use the power cord provided with the standard power supply unit and the one provided with the system The AC POWER LEDs flash when the power cords are connected Power supply unit 1 Standard Power supply unit 2 Option Te Power cord for power supply unit 1 Power cord for power supply unit 2 7 Power on the server The AC POWER LEDs go on 8 Confirm by the STATUS LED or on the POST screen that there are no errors related to the power supply units See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages If the AC POWER LEDs are off reinstall the power supply units If the same error message still appears contact your sales representative Upgrading Your Server 9 17 Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit Replace only a failing power supply unit Se ee IMPORTANT Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally NOTE If one power supply unit fails while the server contains two power supply units in a redundant configuration the failing power supply unit can be repla
93. the license agreement IMPORTANT m Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions m The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system and therefore the Express Setup clears the contents of the hard disk drive m Once Express setup is started do not remove Configuration Diskette from the floppy disk drive without any directions Tools Tools is also intended for initial setup of the server It provides more installation options than Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks run the Off line Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility set up a maintenance partition and update the various BIOS programs Tools Menu RAID Board Present Save Restore RAID Configuration Data Lommel 4 Off line Maintenance Utility Hot Spares 1 p System Diagnostics RAID Level 7 Create Support Disk Write Mode WRITE_THRU Setup Maintenance Partition Maint Part Present BIOS FW etc Update Initialize Remote Management Card System Management Help Return to the Top Menu m Save Restore RAID Configuration Data The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or restored from the floppy disk If the HostRAID and LSI Logic disk array controllers are used together the configuration information of HostRAID is saved or restored If the Adaptec Zero channel raid controller ZCR and L
94. the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0B94 IPMB signal lines do not respond This is not a fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0B95 BMC FRU device failure This is not a fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0B96 BMC SDR Repository failure Turn off the power once and then on again to 0B97 BMC SEL device failure start the server If the error cannot be 0B98 BMC RAM test error corrected contact your service representative 0B99 BMC Fatal hardware error OB9A Management controller not responding Update the RMC firmware If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0OB9B Private I2C bus not responding Turn off the power once and then on again to OB9C BMC internal exception start the server If the error cannot be OB9D BMC A D timeout error corrected contact your service representative OB9E SDR repository corrupt OB9F SEL corrupt OBBO SMBIOS SROM data read error Contact your service representative OBB1 SMBIOS SROM data checksum bad 8100 Memory Error detected in DIMM group 1 Contact your service representative to replace 8101 Memory Error detected in DIMM group 2 __ the DIMM in the relevant group 8102 Memory Error dete
95. this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive A laser beam is used in the CD ROM drive Do not look into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered If a laser beam is caught in your eyes you may lose your eyesight the laser beam is invisible Do not remove the lithium battery gt BO PEO The server contains the lithium battery Do not remove the battery Placing the lithium close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery contact your service representative Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by yourself Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server A Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power outlet before cleaning or installing removing internal optional devices Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off powered Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug which may cause a fire A CAUTION AN Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions Immediately after the server is powered off its internal components such as hard disk drives are
96. to diskette In secure mode the server will not boot from or write to a diskette unless a password is entered To write protect access to diskette whether the server is in secure mode or not use the Setup main menu Floppy Options and specify Floppy Access as read only Set a time out period so that keyboard and mouse input are not accepted Also screen can be blanked and writes to diskette can be inhibited Specify and enable an inactivity time out period of from 1 to 120 minutes If no Keyboard or mouse action occurs for the specified period attempted keyboard and mouse input will not be accepted The monitor display will go blank and the diskette drive will be write protected if these security features are enabled through Setup To resume activity Enter the correct password s Control access to using the BIOS Setup set supervisor password To control access to setting or changing the system configuration set a supervisor password and enable it through Setup If both the supervisor and user passwords are enabled either can be used to boot the server or enable the keyboard and or mouse but only the supervisor password will allow Setup to be changed To disable a password change it to a blank entry in the Change Password menu of the Supervisor Password Option menu found in the Security Subsystem Group To clear the password if you cannot access Setup change the Clear Password jumper see Chapt
97. to collect information Diagnostic Program is used IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system lt For Windows Server 2003 gt Refer to Windows online help lt For Windows 2000 gt 1 Point to Settings in Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Management Tool and double click Computer Management The Computer Management dialog box appears Click System Tool System Information Click Save as System Information File in the Operation menu Input the file name to save in the File Name box D or eo Click Save Troubleshooting 8 29 COLLECTING DR WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION Dr Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors The location to save the information can be specified as you like For more information refer to Chapter 5 MEMORY DUMP If an error occurs the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information If you saved the dump to DAT write down that it is saved as NTBackup or ARCServe on the label You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like For more information refer to Specifying Memory Dump Debug Information refer to Chapter 5 for detail IMPORTANT Consult with your service representative before dumping the memory Dumping the memory while the server is in the successf
98. to replace the fan 0B74 The error occurred during voltage sensor Contact your service representative reading 0B75 System voltage out of the range 0B80 BMC Memory Test Failed Turn off the power once and then on again to 0B81 BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed Start the server If the error cannot be 0B82 BMG core Hardware failure corrected contact your service representative 0B83 BMC 1BF or OBF check failed 0B8B BMC progress check timeout Turn off the power once and then on again to OB8C BMC command access failed start the server If the error cannot be OB8D Could not redirect the console BMC Busy corrected contact your service representative OB8E Could not redirect the console BMC Error Troubleshooting 8 7 Error Error message Recommended Action code OB8F Could not redirect the console BMC Turn off the power once and then on again to Parameter Error start the server If the error cannot be 0B90 BMC Platform Information Area corrupted _ corrected contact your service representative 0B91 BMC update firmware corrupted 0B92 Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted This is not a fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0B93 BMC SDR Repository empty Turn off the power once and then on again to restart
99. used the system will use the nearest value or the default value of the driver 8 24 Troubleshooting Entered the incorrect Product ID CD key Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID CD key Express Setup will start However the setup will stop and asks you to re enter the correct value Also in this case input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completed during Express Setup If these 2 inputs are done correctly there is no problem on Windows 2000 setup Unable to specify the details of Network adapter In Express Setup you can not specify the details of Network adapter Specify them from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000 Windows 2000 is started with Network adapter that has not been specified during Express Setup Windows 2000 will install the recognized Network adapter specified as default value If you want to modify the specification it can be done from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000 Also the Network adapter that has been specified during Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup though the protocol will only be installed Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for each adapter but all the protocols are specified on either adapter It sadesign Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value
100. very hot Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing removing any component Always install a board firmly An incompletely installed board may cause a SO Make sure to complete board installation contact failure resulting in smoking or fire 1 10 Notes on Using Your Server During Operation A CAUTION A a gt PRP Do not pull out or remove the server from the rack unnecessarily Do not pull out or remove the server from the rack unnecessarily Pulling out or removing the server from the rack may cause not only the server to operate incorrectly but also the server to fall on people to make them injured Stay away from the fan Keep your hand or hair away from the cooling fan on the rear of the server Failure to follow this warning may get your hand or hair caught in the fan resulting in injury Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms Disconnect the power plug from the outlet when a thunderstorm is approaching If it starts thundering before you disconnect the power plug do not touch any part of the server including the cables Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock Keep animals away from the server Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock Do not place any object on top of the server The server may fall and cause property damage to the surroundings Do not leave the server with
101. with your service representative m The server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement such as fans internal batteries the internal CD ROM drive the floppy disk drive and the mouse For stable operation of the server NEC recommends you replace these components on a regular basis Consult with your service representative for replacement or the product lives 4 WARNING A Do not remove the lithium battery The server contains the lithium battery Do not remove the battery Placing the lithium or nickel cadmium battery close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery contact your service representative Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by yourself aama 3 4 Mother board 1 14 Notes on Using Your Server USER SUPPORT Before Asking for Repair do the following when the server appears to fail 1 Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected 2 See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description If it does take the recommended measure for it 3 Check if the software required for operation of the s
102. 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run SETUP EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT DOTNET VIDEO SETUP EXE Follow the message to continue the installation 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 21 Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot ini File Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot ini file For the available switch options refer to the following information m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 833721 Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot ini files If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing adding PAE switch in Boot ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory However the Microsoft operating system products which support PAE switch option are limited Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 291988 A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch Below is the example on how to add PAE switch to Boot ini file 1 Click Start point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2
103. 1 WINNT Windows 2000 PAE fastdetect PAE This is the end of editing Boot ini file NOTE If you choose one of the items in the Default operating system drop down list box in Setup and Recovery group box you can make your system start automatically from the switch you specified SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP DEBUG INFORMATION Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix G Product Configuration Record Table Use this table for information about setup and system environment change Hardware Main Unit gene _ __Seril No _ _ Date Installed a T ee Date Installed Clock Serial No Date Installed aT 7 8 size Serial No Date Installed 5 6 size Seraino Date Installed 3 4 size Serial No Date Installed Serial No Date Installed Type S Modelname SeraiNo PO fatto instaticd Hard Disk Drive type o Seano PT Capacity ss Date Installed f o Type number ID1 Type Serial No Capacity Date installed o i Type number ooo oo T T e ID2 Type Serial No Capacity f Date installed Type number type P oo Seano PT Capacity atte Installed Type number oP T o e type Seano PT Capacity S Dateinstaea Type CT Seia e e Capacity iDaate Installed Typenumber of To T T G 2 Product Configuration Record Table Backup De
104. 1024 x 768 or larger Required peripheral equipment Network Interface card CD ROM unit Pointing device such as a mouse Software Microsoft Windows NT Version 4 0 Windows NT Version 4 0 Service Pack 5 or later Internet Explorer 4 01 Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Installing and Using Utilities 6 25 NEC DianaScope NEC DianaScope is software for the remote management of the NEC Express5800 series See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of NEC DianaScope Zi Dianascope Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt vew Favortes Tools Help O O DAO Omn kaos Quen 8 2 3 ses ip lca to arascopepopslonmoston ip NEC Empowered ty innovation To ged Tai N5 SHFTJIS_ EUCIP UTF 8 Cees Item Specific Help 4T 141 5 35H1 Syst em Dat 2 gy 2004 lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab or Legacy Fl oppy A l4 1 25 MB 3 5 Ent er gt sel ects field Legacy Floppy E Hard D sk Pre l ay Primary CE Mast er Processor Settings Language le gt Prinary CE S ave gt I t NOTE You need the server license to activate DianaScope for this product The server license below is attached to this product m DianaScope Additional Server License 1 Notes The online documents explain general information about servers t
105. 160m sys on Adaptec Windows 2000 Family Manager set V1 12 S2 is needed Type the path where the file is located and then click OK If PROSet is already installed uninstall the PROSet before upgrading If the teaming function is enabled disable the function before uninstalling PROSet During upgrade installation Disk Insert dialog box may appear If it appears click Cancel When upgrade installation is completed Device Driver Wizard dialog box may appear If it appears click Cancel then update the system E 12 Installing Windows Server 2003 Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical drives exist Before Re installing the Operation System Be sure to make backup copies before re installing the operation system just in case Re installing the Operation System 1 Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual 2 Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following message appears The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume Confirm the proper drive letter is assigned and then continue the setup 3 Continue the clean installation again following the procedure des
106. 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 95 N8190 126 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 56 95 N8 190 126 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 19 Installing Disk Array Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F To additionally install the N8103 80F 81F in a system containing Windows Server 2003 connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver lt In the case of use of Windows Server 2003 SevicePack1 or Windows Server 2003 R2 gt Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320 1 2 which Device Manager lists Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations and check the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next Copying of the driver is completed and th
107. 5 56 vii Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities e eect ee ce eeeeseee cece ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 NEG EXPRESSBUILDERSiicc 50 okt en ited Reese ee red ee een ee 6 2 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS Based with Local Console cccceeceeseesseeeeeeteenteenees 6 4 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console c ccccesseeseeeeeseeeteeeees 6 9 Startin weet Aen Celie ext etn hele ed ee RN ele et 6 10 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows Based Master Control Menu ccsesesee 6 13 Configuration Diskette Creaton snene e e e E e EE e E Ee E Ea 6 14 NEC ESMPRO Seea ohare ete e a A e E het ah e a O ae AE 6 18 Functions and Features ccccccssesssesscssscesecesecesecnecseecseeeseeeesaeceseeseeseneseenseeeaeesaecaecsaeeeeenes 6 18 Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition s essseessssessesetsreseeeessteressesesreseesesreseeseeses 6 19 Adaptec Storage Manager nsnsniecsierieiic ciiise tesiei i o oi a iE ip EE EE EELE E i eiie 6 20 Power Console Pl Siener e n es Be RO es ee hs ees 6 21 Major Funct ons e e n ie lee i E R E OR OE 6 21 Component Se oorner e E ER EEEE REE RE EEEE E A ERE EE O E EN 6 21 SELVEL SEUD reran A ARRENE EA E AREE EA R E A E EEEE 6 23 Management PO SetU ioneina E AAAA E EEN E EE EE 6 24 NEC Diana CO pennrann as eee ee es ste RS 6 25 Chapter 7 Maintenane a e aaaea eaea aae aea Eeee a Ea aaa EE aE eaea E Ea aae 7 1 Making Backup Copies ccccccsssssess
108. 51EWO Format Disk Only driv Verify Disk Media displayed Format Disk Starts a low level format of the hard drive by writing zeros to the entire disk Serial ATA drives are low level formatted at the factory and do not need to be low level formatted again IMPORTANT Low level formatting erases all data on the drive Be sure to back up your data before performing this operation Verify Disk Media Scans the media in a disk drive for defects Configuring Your Server 4 57 Setting of Bootable 1 3 Start the ACU See Running the Array Configuration Utility ACU described earlier Select Options Array Configuration Utility by using the cursor keys and press Enter Array Configuration Utility Disk Utilitiy Select Manage Array from Main Menu and press Enter Main Menu anage Array reate Array dd Delete Hotspare nitialize Drives All the created arrays are displayed in List of Arrays Press Ctrl and B The confirmation message appears Select Y Mark Bootable is set After making sure that Mark Bootable has been set exit the Array Configuration Utility and reboot the server You will see an asterisk at the front of the array to which the Mark Bootable has been set in List of Arrays dialog box The setting becomes valid after restarting the system 4 58 Configuring Your Server This page is intentionally left blank
109. 6 17 Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver To install optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by the Express Setup follow the procedure below to create Configuration Diskette 1 Display Configuration Diskette Creator window 2 From the File menu click Create new information files Disk Environment dialog box will be displayed 3 Specify each item and click on OK The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order such as Disk Environment dialog box y Server 2003 Standard E nterprise E dhd f 0K OS language Engish 7 Cancel Disk setup Help T RAID Create new RAID Tota ranber of ached dives Number of dives in dive goup I RAID Level Rado z WriteMode Automatic sett Menuai 4 Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on Next NOTE If you click on Cancel all the input value will be deleted 5 When User and application setup is displayed check Apply OEM FD for mass storage device Application setting 7 NECESMPRO Agent I FastCheck I Power Console Plus Adaptec Storage Manager IT Promise Array Management I Express Report Service I WebPAM ln I MSM f User and Group creation New group Create lt Back Cancel Help 6 When the Save Setup Information dialog box is displayed confirm that the Configuration Diskette check box is checked and input f
110. 8103 56 95 N8190 126 sessssssssesssssesesssesessreesssesee E 19 Installing Disk Array Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F sssssseissesserssrssrsisrerrererssrsrse E 20 About Windows Activation inie miei O ia cic E A RE ENERO REEE E 21 Setting for Collecting Memory Dump Debug Information sssssssssseesseesssesersresersrssreesssesens E 24 Appendix F Installing Windows 2000 0 cccceceeeeeseee cnet ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseseeeaneeeeeeeeseneees F 1 Before Installing Windows 2000 c sccesessseesecseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseceseceeceaecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeseseeseneenntess F 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER essssesssrserssesersesseeresersresreeessesees F 1 Installing Service Pack niemi e e a a ea eae aee ea Eaha ea F 2 LOr ekint ESAS a AEAT E EE F 2 Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk F 2 Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F 86 and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection cccccccsccsseesseessesseeesceeeesceeeeesceneeeeseesseesecaeeeeeeeeneeaes F 2 MO DeviCe vince reni ini RE E oeaeeea seca R R ER E ER E E ae F 2 Partition Size s s 22e nire nii i e a E R ER tea te E A E aa F 3 Installing Windows 2000 nnrir iip i aii a E E e ii F 4 Creating Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ceceseseeseeeeeee F 4 Windows 2000 Clean Installation ccccceccescessseeceesceeeceeecesecnseceaecseecaecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeseeeeeeesenerens F
111. AE A E A A TT 8 10 Problems with the S VET r e a ise oi eet a a Stilts 8 10 Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions cccccecssesseessceeeceseceseeeseceeceneeneeeneeenes 8 17 Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2 ccsccssccsseesseeseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseceseenaeenaeenaeeneeenes 8 18 Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 c ccssseesseeseseeceseceeceseceseeeeenes 8 19 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ccecccecccsceseeseeseceeeecsseeeesecseeeceseesenseeseeeeneesees 8 21 Problems with Express Setup c cccccssccssesssecseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeenseenseceaeceaecaecaeeeeeneenes 8 22 Problems with Master Control Menu ccccescceseesseeeeeseeeeecseeeseeseeeeeceseeeseesseenaeenaeceeeaeeenes 8 25 Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator cccccccccceesseecesceeeceesceeeceeeesecesecnneeneeeaeeenes 8 26 Problem with Disk Atrays c c secseccccisseseeitvseccsiethecensedsncdee eceesedescddecsdedeaidasuede chvscdvacedicestcesseteete 8 26 viii Collecting Event Log ssis i eiei i E e e EE E EEE E EES EEEE aeS 8 27 Collecting Configuration Information ccccceccescceseeseeeceeseeeseeeseeeeceeenseceseceaeenaeeneecseeeeeeneeses 8 28 Collecting Dr Watson Diagnostic Information ccccsccesseeseeesceesceeeceseeeeeeeeneeeseeeseenaeenseeaes 8 29 Memory DUMP m reen it E EE ER EE E E E seadenal caval Sonate fede E te teens laa E devas 8 29 Preparing for Memory Dumping
112. BIOS SETUP utility to check the IRQ assignment 3 Ask your service representative to replace the add in card or mother board 3 3 ROM checksum error Replace the mother board 1 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 DRAM refresh test error 1 Check if the DIMM is properly installed 2 Remove the DIMM once and then re install it to check if it operates normally 3 Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM or mother board 1 3 1 3 Keyboard controller error 1 Check if the keyboard is properly connected 2 Replace the mother board 1 3 3 1 No memory or capacity 1 Check if the DIMM is properly installed check error 2 Remove the DIMM once and then re install it to 1 3 4 1 DRAM address error check if it operates normally 1 3 4 3 DRAM test Low Byte 3 Ask your service representative to replace the failed error DIMM or mother board 1 4 1 1 DRAM test High Byte error 1 5 1 1 CPU startup error 1 Check if the CPU is properly installed 1 5 2 1 No CPU installed 2 Remove the CPU once and then re install it to 1 5 4 4 Abnormal voltage check if it operates normally 3 Ask your service representative to replace the failed CPU 2 1 2 3 BIOS ROM copyright test Replace the mother board error 2 2 3 1 Unexpected interrupt test error 8 10 Troubleshooting SOLVING PROBLEMS When the server fails to operate as expected see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given before asking for repair If the ser
113. CSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller lt SATA Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SATA Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 5 Windows Server 2003 Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system Confirm below notes before installing the Windows IMPORTANT m Before starting the installation complete all the process of adding the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe BIOS and optional board specification m The document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached to the other software package which is sold separately from NEC but refer to this document when you install Windows Server 2003 on this model m After completing Express Setup see Setting for Solving Problems described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as Specifying Memory Dump Installing on the Mirrored Volume If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic
114. CSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing Windows Server 2003 E 19 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 75 install it according to the following procedure lt In the case of use of Windows Server 2003 SevicePack1 or Windows Server 2003 R2 gt If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 75 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically lt In the case of Windows Server 2003 which has not installed SevicePack1 gt 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel gt Administrative Tools Computer Management 2 Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device
115. CSI hard disk drive model only Exclusively used with the onboard SCSI connector 3 18 Setting Up Your Server CONNECTING POWER CORD Connect the provided power cord to the server A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 S to 1 8 for details a Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand a Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See A pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source a Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes a Use the authorized power cord only 1 Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the server 2 Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet IMPORTANT m Connect the power cord to a circuit breaker of 15A or less m Secure the power cord with a tie wrap Setting Up Your Server 3 19 To connect the power cord from the server to an uninterruptive power supply UPS use service outlets on the rear of the UPS The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups SWITCH OUT
116. CSISelect Utility Creating Arrays Take the following procedures to create an array Requirements Before creating arrays make sure the disks for the array are connected and installed in your system 1 Start the SCSISelect Utility Select Configure View HostRAID Settings from Options menu of the channel to create an atray Options Configure View SCSI Controller Settings Configure View HostRAID Settings SCSI Disk Utilities Press C on the main menu to create an array Some characters may not be displayed correctly when console redirection is used It is no problem on operation Ignore it and press C slot 00 02 ild Verify Product Drive ATLAS10K4_146SCA Drive ATLAS10K4_147SCA Drive MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_148SCA IMPORTANT m At least two hard disk drives are required to create an array m Ifthe hard disk drives of different capacities are used the array capacity is determined according to the smaller one m Use only the hard disk drives supported by the server m The hard disk drive which has been configured as an array disk drive cannot be selected Configuring Your Server 4 35 3 Select an RAID type in Select RAID Type window and press Enter Put a cursor to the selected item another window opens indicating the minimum and maximum number of disks to create an array and a message for assigning a spare disk NOTE For setting of RAID see Creating RAIDO Array or Creating
117. D systems that are constructed on local NEC Express servers and NEC Express servers connected through networks TCP IP The operations can be done online on graphical screens without the system being stopped Major Functions Power Console Plus has the following features Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration Enabling the change of RAID levels Being compatible with SAF TE Supporting the performance monitor Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring power monitoring and fan monitoring Enabling the settings of Write Read and Cache policies for each logical drive Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate Components Power Console Plus consists of the following five components SNMP Agent This function is not yet supported Do not install SNMP Agent MegaRAID Service Monitor Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted MegaRAID Client Controls the RAID system on graphical screens Install MegaRAID Client in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that is connected through the NEC Express server and network MegaRAID Server Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network Install MegaRAID Server in the NEC Express se
118. Device Controller 0 System timer 12 Mouse 1 Keyboard 13 Numeric processor 2 14 Primary IDE 3 COM2Z serial port PCI 15 Secondary IDE 4 COM1 serial port PCI 16 USB 5 PCI 17 VGA 6 Floppy disk drive 18 7 PCI 19 USB 8 Real time clock 30 LAN1 9 ACPI compliant system 31 LAN2 10 PCI 49 Adaptec SCSI 11 PCI 50 Adaptec SCSI C 2 IRQ This page is intentionally left blank Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 X64 EDITIONS Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Installation Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Exceptional setup and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 lt SCSI Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SCSJ Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller
119. Event Log SEL The events being monitored include overtemperature and overvoltage conditions fan failure or chassis intrusion To enable accurate monitoring the RMC maintains the nonvolatile Sensor Data Records SDRs from which sensor information can be retrieved The RMC provides an ISA host interface to SCR sensor information so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server s current status The RMC performs the following Monitors server board temperature and voltage Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot FRB m Detects and indicates baseboard fan failure m Manages the SEL interface m Manages the SDR Repository interface Monitors the SDR SEL timestamp clock m Monitors the system management watchdog timer Monitors the periodic SMI timer Monitors the event receiver Controls secure mode including video blanking diskette write protect monitoring and front panel lock unlock initiation m Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support Also NEC ESMPRO supports these features 2 22 General Description DEGRADATION FEATURE The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM or processor to assure continuous operation of the server when the POST Power On Self Test self diagnosis program after power on detects such a DIMM or processor NOTE The degradation feature is only available when at least two DIMMs or processors are installed Failed DI
120. For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 1000MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB Application Size 2292MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk NOTES If you want to install using Express Setup calculate the minimally required partition size as follows m Ifyou do not apply Windows 2000 Service Pack The larger value of either one Minimum Partition Size described above or 4095MB m If you want to apply Windows 2000 Service Pack The larger value of either one Minimum Partition Size described above 850MB or 4095MB Re installing to the hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows 2000 with the current partition of the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix D to re install the system
121. GHz 1MB 1MB 2MB 2MB 2MB 2MB Standard 1 Maximum 2 Chipset E7520 800MHz Memory Minimum 1GB 512MBx2 Maximum 16GB The standard DIMM must be replaced Expansion unit 2 DIMMs 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB Expansion times 3 times Memory module SDRAM DIMM Low Profile DDR2 400 Buffered Type Error check Graphics VRAM ECC ATI RADEON 7000 VRAM 16MB Auxiliary Floppy disk standard 3 5 inch drive x 1 input Hard disk standard _ None device Hard disk maximum 900 GB 300 GB x 3 CD ROM standard ATAPI interface x 1 Load on tray type x24 speed Hard disk drive bay Slots 3 RAID RAIDO RAID1 RAID5 option Additional PCI X 64 bit 133MHz 1 slot slot PCI X 64 bit 66MHz 1 slot low profile LAN interface 1000Base T 100Base TX 10Base T 2 ports External Keyboard mouse MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port interface USB 4 pin 4 ports 2 for front panel 2 for rear panel Serial DB 9 2 ports 1 for front panel 1 for rear panel Network RJ 45 2 ports Display MINI D sub 15 pin 1 port SCSI Ultra 320 SCSI 1 port Power supply 1 1 redundant option hot swappable Fan 5 5 redundant option Cabinet design Rack mount type 1U External dimensions 425 width x 43 height x 718 depth mm Weight Max 15 kg 20 kg Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 10 200 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 1 Hz Power
122. Guide line Test window Diagnosis tool title shows a name of this diagnosis and Version information Test windows title shows the progress of diagnosis When it completes it shows Test End Test Result shows the information including time of start end and progress and result of the diagnosis Guide line shows a description of keys to navigate the window Test window Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics the test result shows Abnormal End in red color Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which error occurred Take a note of the error message showed and contact your service representative 7 10 Maintenance 7 9 10 11 12 Follow the Guide line showed in the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End user Menu showed below TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build020901 1 1m Enduser Menu lt Test Result gt lt Device List gt lt Log Info gt lt Option gt lt Reboot gt Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key lt Test Result gt shows the screen of the diagnosis completed aforementioned lt Device List gt shows the information of all the devices connected lt Log Info gt shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis It can be saved to a floppy disk To save the log information to a floppy disk insert
123. In Control Panel double click System 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Settings under Setup and Recovery 4 Under System Setup click Edit to open Boot ini 5 Add PAE to Operating Systems section in Boot ini file and then save it lt Example of Boot ini file gt boot loader timeout 30 default multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS operating systems multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS Windows Server 2003 fastdetect multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS Windows Server 2003 PAE fastdetect PAE C CMDCONS BOOTSECT DAT Microsoft Windows Recovery Console cmdcons This is the end of editing Boot ini file NOTE If you choose one of the items in the Default operating system drop down list box in Setup and Recovery group box you can make your system start automatically from the switch you specified 5 22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Setting for Solving Problems Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur Memory Dump Debug Information This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump debug information in the server IMPORTANT Cautions for the Memory Dump m The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory dump Customers need only to specify the memory dump m If any trouble occ
124. Install the server Install the server into the rack assembly Connecting peripheral devices Connect peripheral devices to the server Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord to the server Turning on the server Power on the server to start software setups Setups depend on the optional internal devices installed and the peripheral devices connected s Installing the operating system Install an operating system to the server See Chapter 5 a Installing the utilities Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 s Making backup copies of system information After all the system setup procedures are completed make backup copies of system information System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after replacing the system board Setting Up Your Server 3 3 SELECTING SERVER SITE To use the server install it on a standard EIA 19 inch rack assembly Refer to the documentation attached to the rack or contact your service representative for the installation of the server on the rack 4 WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details PO Do not use the server in any unapproved place a Do not connect the ground line to a gas pipe A CAUTION Obser
125. K3AMD NS1 PROSET WS03_32E The Intel R PROSet Install Shield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Click Install When Install Shield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish o NO O OA Restart the system D 12 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Network Driver Specify the details of network driver One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu click Control Panel click Network Connections and click Local Area Connection The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu click Settings and click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears 4 Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB 5 Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Double click Network Adapter Name in the list 3 Click the Link and specify the Link Sp
126. MMs and processors may be identified on the screen that the POST displays or with the BIOS setup utility of the server SETUP They may also be identified on the system that has the NEC ESMPRO installed REMOTE POWER ON FEATURE WAKE ON LAN The remote power on function turns on the server through a network It sends a special packet from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off powered To enable this feature use the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 The remote power on feature is not available in the following cases Press the POWER switch once to start the OS and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure m Abnormal previous system shut down m No power supply to the server due to turned off breaker disconnected power cord power blackout etc AC LINK FEATURE When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply UPS unit the server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server The AC Link feature can be enabled or disabled with the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 General Description 2 23 SYSTEM SECURITY To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system the system includes a full lockable front bezel and Server Management software that monitors the front bezel intrusion switch Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring To unlock th
127. N8100 1056F 1057F 1058F 1059F 1060F 1099F 1121F 1122F 1123F 1124F NEC Express5800 120Rf 1 User s Guide 5th Edition 5 2006 ONL 4133eN 120Rf1 100 99 0604 PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER The information disclosed in this document including all designs and related materials is the valuable property of NEC Corporation NEC and or its licensors NEC and or its licensors as appropriate reserve all patent copyright and other proprietary rights to this document including all design manufacturing reproduction use and sales rights thereto except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others The NEC product s discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product However actual performance of each such product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration customer data and operator control Since implementation by customers of each product may vary the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC To allow for design and specification improvements the information in this document is subject to change at any time without notice Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC is prohibited First Printing May 2005 Fifth Printing April 2006 Revised April 2006 Copyright 2005 2006 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5
128. Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations radio button and check off the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Check the Include this location in the search check box and when using N8104 86 88 111 specify lt CD ROM driveletter gt WINNT DOTNET BCS5 PRO100 WS03XP32 And when using N8104 103 109 112 113 115 specify lt CD ROM driveletter gt WINNT DOTNET BCS5 PRO1000 WS03XP32 Then click Next Click Finish 5 16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT Adaptive Load Balancing ALB Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally If you want to utilize AFT ALB feature follow the procedure below to setup 1 NONA Double click Intel R
129. OTE If you choose one of the items in the Default operating system drop down list box in Setup and Recovery group box you can make your system start automatically from the switch you specified E 24 Installing Windows Server 2003 SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP DEBUG INFORMATION Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix F Installing Windows 2000 This section explains how to install the Windows 2000 without using Express Setup tool BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS 2000 Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows 2000 Installation Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Exceptional setup and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 lt SCSI Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch N8103 86 Disk Array Controller Och Adaptec HostRAID SCSJ Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190
130. RAID1 Array described later IMPORTANT A fier creating an array set the boot priority for the created array according to Boot Priority Create RAID Vendor MAXTOR MAXTOR MAXTOR at alot ons Prod ATLAS10K4_146SCA ATLAS10K4_147SCA ATLAS10K4_148SCA RAID O High Performance No Fault Tolerance RAID 1 Fault Tolerance RAID 10 Fault Tolerance High Performance 4 36 Configuring Your Server Creating RAIDO Array To create a RAIDO array 1 Select RAID 0 on Select RAID Type window RAID O High Performance No Fault Tolerance RAID 1 Fault Tolerance RAID 10 Fault Tolerance High Performance 2 Use the cursor key to move the focus to the desired hard disk drive and determine it by Space and then press Enter AIC 7902 A at slot 00 RAID O Select RAID members D Vendor Product I O MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_146SCA 1 MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_147SCA 2 MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_148SCA An X mark is placed next to the selected hard disk drive 3 Select the desired stripe size and press Enter Available stripe sizes are 16 32 and 64 KB 4 Enter the desired RAID Name in Assign RAID Name window IMPORTANT m RAID Name must be unique and up to 15 characters are acceptable m Ifa valid partition information or a boot block is detected in the selected hard disk drive a warning message will be displayed Select Yes to continue creating an array No to terminate m Take sufficient care no
131. Recovery 5 Enter the location to write the debug information to the text box e g Write the debug information in D drive with the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP 5 46 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup IMPORTANT m To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 12MB In case the memory capacity is more than 2GB a free area of 2048 12MB or more m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Click Performance Options Click Change on the Virtual Memory dialog box Modify Initial Size in the Paging File Size for Selected Drive box to the value larger than Recommended Size and click Specify IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is re
132. SI Logic disk array controller are used together the configuration information of ZCR is saved or restored IMPORTANT In these cases If you want to save or restore the configuration information of LSI Logic disk array controller refer to the Power Console Plus User s Guide 6 6 Installing and Using Utilities Save Disk Array Configuration Data The configuration information on the disk mirroring controller is saved into the floppy disk If you set or change RAID always use this function to save the configuration information into a floppy disk IMPORTANT Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function In that case this menu will not be shown Restore Disk Array Configuration Data The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard disk drive on the disk mirroring controller If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake restore the configuration information When the defected disk array controller is replaced the configuration information on the hard disk drive must be saved into the disk array controller However if the configuration information on the new disk mirroring controller is saved into a hard disk drive use this function to restore the configuration information IMPORTANT m Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function In that case this menu will not be shown m This is a function for maintenance Please do
133. SI devices reports a description of each device Run these utilities before configuring SCSI devices To enter the utility select SCSI Disk Utilities on the Options menu The SCSI ID scan begins displaying the message as shown below When the SCSI ID scan completes the screen listing SCSI IDs and associated devices appears Find out the SCSI ID for the installed optional on this screen You can also view the device information by selecting a device and pressing Enter The following sub menu appears SCSI ID 4 xxxxxxxxx Firmware XXXX Xxx Capacity xxGB Verify Disk Media The following table lists submenu items and descriptions Submenu item Description Format Formats the selected device in the raw level Verify Disk Media Verifies all the sectors in the selected device If one or more bad sectors are found reassigns the sectors Configuring Your Server 4 27 Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board To configure SCSI devices connected to an optional SCSI controller board use the SCSI BIOS utility provided with the optional SCSI controller board Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for details When the server has multiple SCSI controller boards installed the server first displays the start up message of the SCSISe ect utility for the SCSI controller on the mother board It then displays the utility start up message for additiona
134. Select utility starts and its Main menu appears 3 Select the channel and press Enter AIC 7902 A at Slot 23 02 03 00 AIC 7902 B at Slot 23 02 03 01 NOTE AIC 7902A is for backup file devices AIC 7902B is for internal SCSI hard disk drives The Options menu appears 4 Select option in the Options menu and press Enter If you wish to configure the adapter or a device select Configure View SCSI Controller Settings If you wish to format a disk verify disk media or display a list of devices and their SCSI IDs select SCSI Disk Utilities Configuring Your Server 4 23 Exiting the Utility To exit the utility press Esc until a message prompts you to exit if you changed any setting you are prompted to save the changes before you exit Configure View SCSI Controller Settings The Configure View Host Adapter Settings has the following menu items and parameters Read descriptions to select a correct parameter for each menu item SCSI Bus Interface Definitions To set three menu items under SCSI Bus Interface Definitions select a menu item with the cursor keys 4 or t and press Enter to fix the item Use the cursor keys or t for parameter selection The following table lists menu items available parameters and descriptions Menu item Parameter Description SCSI Controller ID 0 7 15 Select 7 SCSI Controller Parity Enabled Select Enabled Disabled SCSI Controller Enabled Enable
135. Source Application Popup t Time 1338 Category None Type Infomation Everti 41 L User N A BS Computer SERVER 1 Description The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with this system contact the CPU manufacturer to see if this mix of processors is supported Data Bytes C Words 0000 00 00 00 00 0l 00 d4 00 0008 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 0010 02 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 Ck 0018 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0020 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Click Management Tool gt Event Viewer from the Control Panel Select the type of the log to collect On Application Log the events related to the running application is archived On Security Log the events related to the security is archived On System Log the events occurred at the item which configures Windows 2000 system is archived Click Save as in the Run menu Input the file name of archived log in the File Name box Select the type of the log file you want to save in the File Type list box and click OK For more information refer to Windows 2000 Online Help 8 28 Troubleshooting COLLECTING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification In order
136. TA connector on the mother board The right side bay is connected to channel 2 of the SATA connector on the mother board 2 6 General Description Rear View SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 14 1 14 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 General Description 2 7 Low profile PCI board extension slot Mount PCI board of the low profile type into this slot The slot number is 1C Full height PCI board extension slots Mount PCI board of the full height type in the slot The slot number is 1B Captive thumbscrew Secures the logic cover to the chassis Power supply Supplies DC power to the server AC inlet Connect the power cord to this socket Redundant power supply slot Hot swap SCSI hard disk drive model only An optional slot for 1 1 redundant power configuration Mouse keyboard connectors Connect the mouse and keyboard to the connectors through the provided relay cables SCSI connector Hot swap SCSI hard disk drive model only Connect external SCSI device to this connector UID LED blue This LED goes on when the UID switch is pressed The LED also goes on when software issues a command UID switch Press this switch to turn on off the UID LEDs on the front and rear panels of the server Pressing the switch once turns on the LEDs Pressing it again turns them off DUMP NMI switch Press this switch to dump s
137. TA driver for Windows XP 2003 x64 Edition When Adaptec HOSTRAID SATA is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 1 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 80F board is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear When the following message is shown press Enter to start Welcome to Setup When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished the system reboots automatically Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions has installed Go on the step 13 Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Editions has installed Go on the step 10 The Windows setup screen will be displayed after logged on to the system IMPORTANT m In this case the Windows setup screen may not be displayed Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 according to the following procedures m You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 after the application of System update Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 In this case note that the Windows setup screen is not displayed Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Confirm the parameters and click OK When the installation has completed remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD ROM from the CD ROM drive and restart the system Wh
138. TEM If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged use the following procedures to recover the system IMPORTANT m After recovering the system see Updating the System in Chapter 5 and be sure to update the system Also on Windows 2000 you need to update all the drivers after the system update For more information see Installing and Setting Device Drivers in Chapter 5 m Ifthe hard disk drive can not be recognized you can not recover the system Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk not system recovery disk to recover the system 1 Turn on the system power 2 Insert the Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 3 Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary The Windows 2000 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again 4 Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states m Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is displayed m A screen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed 8 32
139. The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again If the RAID controller including embedded HostRAID feature or SCSI controller is installed in the system press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is displayed A screen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of mass storage devices is displayed 10 11 12 13 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 7 Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter Adaptec HOSTRAID driver for Windows XP 2003 x64 Edition When Adaptec HOSTRAID SCSI is installed Adaptec SA
140. The message Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Express Server or Workstation will be displayed If you want to use the parameters file click Yes If not click No 6 NOTE appears Click Confirm after reading that NOTE If some operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive already the message which asks if you continue the installation appears 5 36 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 7 Ifyou select Yes at step 5 place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the server If not go on the next step NOTE If you set the floppy disk at this step do not remove the floppy disk from the server until the message as removing the floppy disk appears Using the existing Configuration Disk The parameters files in the floppy disk is listed in dialog box 1 Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup After the parameters file is specified the message Do you want to review or modify the Setup File parameters appears 2 Ifyou want to modify or confirm the parameters file click Review If not click Skip Click Review Go on the next step Click Skip Go on the step 9 NOTE If you do not use disk array controller go on the step 9 After that the dialog box appears Using a blank disk 1 Click the box under Setup File Name A or press A The dialog box appears 2 Input the file name and
141. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Statement Warning This is a Class A product In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 BSMI Statement FRERE ie PRWANEm BREWS EA Re gt BRE DON SAE gt AEAT gt 15 FS Oy BER ERLE ES OTR o Trademarks NEC DianaScope NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows Server Windows NT and MS DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Intel Pentium and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc ROM DOS is a trademark of Datalight Inc LSI Logic MegaRAID MegaRAID Storage Manager and Power Console P
142. Troubleshooting When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of mass storage devices is displayed SCSI Model Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Win2000 and press Enter Then it returns to the screen of Procedure 5 Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1 02 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SCSI is installed Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver for Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SATA is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 1 Controller Driver When N8103 80F board is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Adaptec I20 RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000 XP 2003 When N8103 86 board is installed Press R to select the recovery option If you are requested press R to select system recovery procedure If you are requested select either of the procedure below Manual Recove
143. Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting Tools Create Support FD on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER m Manual start by pressing F4 When the Off line Maintenance Utility is installed press F4 while the start up screen of the server is on screen The Off line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk drive 8 36 Troubleshooting Features of Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility provides the following features Available features vary depending on the way you started the Off line Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT See the on line help for details of the Off line Maintenance Utility For further information ask your service representative m PMI Information Viewer Provides the functions to view the system event log SEL sensor data record SDR and field replaceable unit FRU and to make a backup copy of them Using this feature you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part m BIOS Setup Viewer Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility to a text file m System Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file m System Information Management Provides the function to make a back up copy of your data Without the backup data the system specific information and or configuration may not be restored Only the authorized personnel is allowe
144. W tnn eee Hine Aen ae Ree A ts A Ee Re 2 2 External Vi CW enone aeae e ncn E OE TETEE SE EEE a E R 2 3 Front View with Front Bezel Closed ccccccssecssesssesseesscesscesceseensecssecnaecseecaeseneseneeaneseneserens 2 4 Front View with Front Bezel Removed ccceeccesceseceseceseeeseceeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeneensees 2 5 Rear VIC WiFi eves on erase aves ooytaasee tela ETE EE SE none oat ve ate alee ERN 2 6 Internal VIEW seese a EEA EEEE EEEE EE EET S 2 8 Mother Board sssini ee E AE E EE A E EEE oe EEE EEEE 2 9 Stat TSAI Faa Terk rOl a EPEE EE A E A EEE A E E E abst d a stad 2 10 B aE E D DEP LE EEE EE EE E EEE AEA EEE ARE DAET 2 10 SEATS EE Duna EA E A A E E 2 10 DISK ACCES SLED veaa e e A a A ER 2 12 IA BA E 2 DIESE EE E E ETE A A E AT oat aad 2 12 10 1 Bp E BELE I E A A A E EAE EE A E AEE cette A SET 2 12 Disk Access TED E E E os A A EEES 2 12 Hard Disk Drive LED SCSI hot plug HDD model only ss sssesseseessrseessesersesseesesseeesssesees 2 13 LAN Connector LEDS eien paa a E EE E E EREA E 2 14 Standard Features cenn nn ren n n E EEE E E E EE E A R E E an 2 15 Power Supply mnrcnacccrn eai RE EE SEE E REEE 2 16 Peripheral BaysSisnncrno n eeii a E O REE E a a aaa 2 16 System Colg renien REEE had hed E E eects hee R ERE 2 16 SAPETE TOLK a EAN OEEO E AAO OARECE 2 17 System Board Features ic oreren ie eie a e EEE e e EE Ea REE RE 2 17 Proces SOT a ill ee E AE E TA E NR 2 17 MeMO a eene dl atid aad eek E
145. a do not delete the partition NOTES m The maintenance partition once created will not be recreated again m When the maintenance partition does not exist some menu items do not appear 6 8 Installing and Using Utilities Create Maintenance Partition NEC EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55MB of the maintenance partition on the system disk or disk array system as work area The various utilities are installed when the maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance partition is already created Install Maintenance Partition Utilities Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD ROM Update Maintenance Partition Utilities Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk This menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or attached with your system FDISK Execute FDISK command of ROM DOS system You can create delete partitions etc BIOS FW etc Update This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the update disk 3 5 inch floppy disk that is distributed from NEC customer service representative After rebooting the system an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated IMPORTANT Do not turn off the server while the update program is running
146. a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and select lt Save F gt lt Option gt change where to output log lt Reboot gt Restarts the Express Server Select lt Reboot gt in the End user Menu above The Express Server restarts and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server Plug the power code This completes the System Diagnostics Maintenance 7 11 RELOCATING STORING THE SERVER Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See h pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself a Do not install the server in any place other than specified a Do not connect disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source IMPORTANT m Ifthe server needs to be relocated stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent contact the service representative m Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk drive if any m Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disk drives to relocated the server if the contains any Take a floppy disk and a CD
147. ad the Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM The manual explains the ASMBE installation procedure and notes on operating ASMBE 6 20 Installing and Using Utilities Adaptec Storage Manager TM Adaptec Storage Manager hereinafter abbreviated to ASM is an application that locally or remotely manages HostRAID storage system and provides RAID functions through the SCSI interface on the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition in your server You can use the following functions for HostRAID by installing ASM in your system Features m Creating disks at a level of RAIDO RAID1 or RAID10 m Creating Hot Spare disks that are to be used for automatically executing Rebuild if a redundant disk array enters the Degraded state m Making a consistency check on redundant disk arrays m Recording HostRAID events into the event log Before attempting to operate ASM read the Adaptec Storage Manager User s Guide included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM The manual explains the ASM installation procedure and notes on operating ASM IMPORTANT You cannot install ASM with EXPRESS Setup Install ASM manually Installing and Using Utilities 6 21 Power Console Plus Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system of the disk array controller MegaRAID controller produced by LSI Logic Use of Power Console Plus enables operations e g monitoring and maintenance of RAI
148. affect human lives Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human lives including medical devices nuclear facilities and devices aeronautics and space devices transportation facilities and devices and facilities and devices requiring high reliability NEC assumes no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury death or property damage if the server has been used in the above conditions Do not use the server if any smoke odor or noise is present If smoke odor or noise is present immediately turn off the POWER switch and disconnect the power plug from the outlet then contact your service representative Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire Keep needles or metal objects away from the server Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or openings in the floppy disk or CD ROM drive Doing so may cause an electric shock Do not use the server in any unapproved place Install the server on a standard EIA 19 inch rack assembly Do not install the rack containing the server in a place inappropriate to the rack installation environment Failure to follow these instructions may cause some bad influences to be imposed on the server and other systems installed on the rack and also a fire or personal injury due to falling of the rack may occur For the detailed explanation on the place where the server should be installed and the
149. ake sure that the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP LED goes off Turn the mouse upside down and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it Take out the ball from the mouse Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand and turn your hand holding the mouse the mouse is on your palm with the button upward The mouse ball is released onto your palm Mouse ball Mouse ball cover Bottom View Roller Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water and squeeze it firmly Rub off stains on the mouse ball Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in Step 5 Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol Wipe stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab Blow out any dust from the mouse Protect your eyes from the dust Put the mouse ball back into the mouse Place the mouse ball cover and rotate it clockwise until it is locked 7 6 Maintenance Cleaning CD ROM A dusty CD ROM or dust accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD ROM regularly ds 2 Make sure that the server is powered the POWER SLEEP LED is lit Press the CD tray Open Close button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray opens Hold the CD ROM lightly and take it out from
150. all ASMBE or ASM 4 See ASMBE ASM User s Guide Install Standby Hibernation Lock driver Set an operation mode End 1 See Chapter 4 You can create RAID by using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER In this case only you need to do is to set the HostRAID feature to Enabled by using BIOS SETUP Utility 2 For Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Adaptec Storage Manager User s Guide For Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide 5 56 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Migration of Hard Disk Drive Migration When you want the system SCSI hard disk drive using SCSI controller on the I O board migrate to RAID of SCSI HostRAID the Migration must be executed For details refer to Express5800 SCSI HostRAID Migration procedure Windows of online documents IMPORTANT SATA Model does not support Migration of hard disk drive Migration Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with your server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 6 2 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of installing and configuring your server Shipped with all NEC servers the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM provides a flexible guided installation proces
151. ame as the value specified for HUB Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter Click OK on the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process from Network and Dial up Connection to display the property dialog box for local area network NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems in Chapter 5 When PROSet is installed 1 Double click Intel R PROSet Wired on the Control Panel window The Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box appears Double click the Intel R PROSet Wired icon Put the cursor to the network driver in the list Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Also specify the other network driver with the same progress above F 12 Installing Windows 2000 Re install the Network Driver After installing OS and deleting the network drivers if you want to re install the network drivers follow the procedure below 1 2 Restart OS and logon to your system Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box appears Click Next Confi
152. an be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs E 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 2900MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB Application Size 4192MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk About the Upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2 The in place upgrade from Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2003 R2 is not recommended because it may overwrite any files or registries and cause unexpected impact to the system or the applications If you install Windows Server 2003 R2 backup user data referr
153. are available for upgrade USB interface A USB support driver is required Two network ports Many Available Features Graphic accelerator RADEON 7000 support El Torito Bootable CD ROM no emulation mode format support POWER switch mask Software power off Remote power on feature AC Link feature Consoleless feature Self diagnosis Power On Self Test POST Test and Diagnosis T amp D Easy and Fine Setup NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system setup utility Configuration Parameter Diskette Creator SETUP BIOS setup utility SCSI Select SCSI device RAID configuration utility Array configuration 2 16 General Description Power Supply The SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model contains one auto sensing 465 watt power supply at an operating frequency of 50 60Hz A second optional power supply may be added as part of a fault tolerant hot swap design With two power supplies installed in the unlikely event of a power supply failure the load is transferred to the remaining power supply without interruption to normal operation In this case the faulty power supply can be replaced without powering down the system NOTE The power supplies are not hot swappable unless there are two power supplies installed The power supply for SATA fixed hard disk drive model is rated for 425 watts of power at an operating frequency of 50 60Hz The power subsystem supports implementation of remote management features includ
154. ation Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003 Windows activation process is as follows 1 NOTE When you use Windows Server 2003 R2 activation process is not needed Click Run on Start menu Type as follows in the Open box and click OK oobe msoobe a Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Activate Windows Let s activate Windows This copy of Windows must ctivated with Microsoft before you can continue using it over the Internetis quick and e You don t need to give your name or other personal information when you activate Windows SY nt to telephon e Windows No log me off To continue click Next E 22 Installing Windows Server 2003 The following screen is displayed ating new Installation ID 3 Process Windows activation according to the following message Activate Windows Activate Windows by phone Just four steps and you re done SEAH Select your location z Step2 Calla number b h a custorr Step 3 Step 4 y sentative gave you A B C D E 5 G To continue click Next Change Product key Remind Me Later Installing Windows Server 2003 E 23 Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot ini File Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot ini file For the available switch options refer to the following informat
155. ation however only the smaller drive can be selected as the copy source or first drive We do not recommend that you build an array on Windows dynamic disks volumes as it will result in data loss 10 Select a source drive from the Select Source Drive list box and press Enter 00 Maxtor 6Y120M0 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 Configuring Your Server 11 When you are finished select Done and press Enter Creation of RAID starts Wait for a while Properti Array 00 z Sysr Type Array Size 149GB Stripe Size Array Status OPTIMAL 00 Maxtor 6Y120M0 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 4 51 4 52 Configuring Your Server Managing Arrays Use the Manage Arrays option in the main menu that appears by selecting Option Array Configuration Utility to view array properties and delete arrays Main r anage Arrays reate Array dd Deleate Hostspare nitialize Drives m Viewing Array Properties Select Manage Arrays on Main Menu and press Enter to display the list of RAID drives From the List of Arrays dialog box select the RAID drive you want to view and press Enter The Array Properties dialog box appears showing detailed information on the array The physical disks associated with the array are displayed here Array 00 J Type RAID O Array Size Stripe Size 64KB Array Status z OPTIMAL 00 Maxtor 6Y120M0 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 Press Esc to return to the previous menu m Deleting Arrays
156. ay be started with a simple key operation while POST is in progress and requires no specific start up disk Using SCSISelect Utility Use the SCSISe ect utility mainly to set the transfer speed of connected SCSI devices or to configure the internal hard disk drives connected to the onboard SCSI controller as a RAID drive HostRAID The SCSI devices include those installed in the backup file bay such as an external DAT and MO but not hard disk drives IMPORTANT SCSI configuration must be made on a per SCSI controller basis with a utility The server contains one SCSI controller When you added optional SCSI controllers you need to make configuration for each SCSI controller in addition to the standard internal SCSI controller Some additional SCSI controllers may require a different utility to make changes to the configuration Configuring SCSI Controller on Mother Board The following describes configuration for the SCSI controller on the mother board of the server 4 22 Configuring Your Server Running the Utility To run the utility perform the following procedures 1 Power on the server The following message appears while POST is in progress IMPORTANT The message appears for each additional SCSI controller Adaptec SCSI BIOS Vxxx xxxxx c 2000 Adaptec Inc All Rights Reserved 4 4 4 Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM Utility gt gt 2 Press and hold Ctrl and A The SCSI
157. beep Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific group See Chapter 9 for the specifications of DIMMs DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order 5 and 6 3 and 4 then 1 and 2 Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered Take a note of beep code pattern and take appropriate action according to the table listed earlier in Beep Codes POST fails to complete O Is the DIMM board installed At least two DIMM boards are required for operation Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order 5 and 6 3 and 4 then 1 and 2 L Is the memory size large The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large Wait for a while Q Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start up POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding In such a case restart the server once again Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start up message appears when you restart the server Q Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices Operation of the server with unauthorized
158. bjects may be fallen on the rack Place near a device generating intense magnetic field such as a TV radio broadcast communication antenna power transmission wire and electromagnetic crane is placed If unavoidable contact your service representative to request proper shield construction Place where the power cord of the server must be connected to an AC outlet that shares the outlet of another device with large power consumption Place near equipment that generates power noise e g contact spark at power on power off of commercial power supply through a relay If you must install the server close to such equipment request your service representative for separate power cabling or noise filter installation Setting Up Your Server 3 5 UNPACKING THE SYSTEM When you receive your system inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking If the shipping boxes are damaged note the damage and if possible photograph it for reference After removing the contents of the containers keep the cartons and the packing materials If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes file a damage claim with the carrier immediately 3 6 Setting Up Your Server INSTALLING THE SERVER This subsection provides the instructions for the rack mount server unit into a standard EIA 19 inch rack cabinet Also this subsection describes the removal procedures for the rack mount server unit from the 19 inch rack cabinet Obse
159. board 7 2 Maintenance CLEANING Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape A WARNING N Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before working with the server gt O aO A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details OF a Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions a Make sure to complete board installation Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap Maintenance 7 3 Cleaning the Server For daily cleaning wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth Follow the procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces IMPORTANT m To avoid altering the material and color of the server do not use volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server m The power receptacle the cables the connectors on the rear panel of server and the inside of the server must be kept dry Do not moisten them with water Make sure that the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP LED goes o
160. bose Silent Diagnostic SCSI Controller Int Enabled Enable or disable SCSI BIOS 13 Support Disabled Select Enabled for most cases other than the NOT Scan following Disabled To boot the OS from a hard disk drive scan bus connected to any other controller than SCSI controller If the controller has no hard disk drives connected there is no problem BIOS of the SCSI controller may be disabled to reserve an area in the expansion ROM space if the controller has no hard disk drives connected Domain Validation Enabled Select Enabled Disabled Support Removable Boot Only AIC 79xx BIOS automatically controls the Disks Under Int 13 All Disks removable disks as Fixed Disks Disabled BIOS Support for Enabled Select Enabled Bootable CD ROM Disabled Factory set HostRAID Move the cursor onto HostRAID and press Enter to choose the HostRAID option Submenu item Parameter Description HostRAID Enabled Select Disabled if the onboard HostRAID Disabled controller is not used Factory set NOTE For detail explanation on the HostRAID feature see SCSISelect Utility User s Manual and Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide or Adaptec Storage Manager User s Guide You may view or print these documents from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM 4 26 Configuring Your Server SCSI Disk Utilities This utility scans the SCSI bus for SC
161. carrier IMPORTANT To maintain the cooling effect in the server install the dummy tray in the vacant slot of the disk bay 6 Remove four screws securing the drive tray 7 Remove the drive tray from the carrier ZA y NOTE Keep the drive tray for future use 9 10 Upgrading Your Server Place the hard disk drive onto the carrier with its connector facing the rear of the carrier Secure the hard disk drive in the carrier with four screws removed in Step 6 10 Install the drive carrier into the hard disk drive bay and secure the carrier to the chassis with two screws removed in Step 5 11 Reinstall the side cover 12 Close the front bezel Upgrading Your Server 9 11 Removal SCSI hot plug HDD model Take the following steps to remove a hard disk drive NOTE If removing a failing hard disk drive confirm the slot in which the DISK LED of the hard disk drive is amber before starting the removal DISK LED 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the front bezel 3 Push the lever to unlock and open the handle IMPORTANT Do not press the POWER switch during the installation or removal of the hard disk drive if your server is running 4 Firmly hold the handle and hard disk drive and pull out the
162. ced Server Configuration Method of disk arrays BIOS utility NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and ASMBE or ASM Features m HostRAID supports the hot swap rebuild function for the hot plug insertion Hot Swap of hard disk drives when SCSI HostRAID is installed m HostRAID enables the BIOS utility to select the disk array standard SCSI for each channel when SCSI HostRAID is installed m HostRAID enables the BIOS utility to select the disk array standard SATA for each channel when SATA HostRAID is installed m Since the JAVA based management utility ASMBE uses the browser IES 5 or later the software does not need to be installed into each client PC for management The software must be installed in each server 5 52 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Notes The following explains general notes on HostRAID lt SCSI HostRAID gt Only a hard disk drive can be connected to a channel with which HostRAID is enabled through SCSI BIOS To connect a device other than a hard disk drive disable HostRAID and use it as the standard SCSI If you replace a hard disk drive being used with HostRAID let 60 seconds or more pass after removing the hard disk drive and then install a new hard disk drive If the interval is too short an unexpected event may occur You should install a new hard disk drive after confirming the removal of the old hard disk drive on the ASMBE or ASM window After rebuilding by using hot spare do
163. ced with the system operating power on state Skip step 2 Locate the failing power supply unit by the AC POWER LED on the rear of each power supply unit The LED of the failing power supply unit is amber Shutdown the system and press the POWER switch to turn off the power Disconnect the power cord from the failed power supply Hold the handle of the failing power supply While pressing the lever pull the power supply to remove if from the chassis If operating the server with a single power supply unit without installing a new one install the cover you removed in step 3 of installation procedure IMPORTANT To maintain the cooling effect in the server install the blank cover in the vacant slot Install the new power supply unit taking steps 4 to 8 of Installation and confirm that the power supply unit is installed normally NOTE If one of the two power supply units of the server is replaced while the power is on the POWER LED of the new power supply unit goes on If it is replaced while the power is off the LED flashes The LED goes on when the power is turned on 9 18 Upgrading Your Server Server Pull out from the Rack The server needs to be pulled out from the rack for installing removing any components other than the hard disk drives and power supply units 4 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may res
164. cess iii des A A A A E E a 4 28 RAID Configuration 265 0622 scteocesinsias fs seca sensecteed E 4 29 RAID Configuration of SCSI Hard Disk Drive ccccecseesceeceesceeecesecesecesecseecseesaeeneeeneeenes 4 29 RAID Configuration of Serial ATA Hard Disk DI ive eee eeeeceeeeecneeeeceseeeeeseteeeaeenereres 4 44 Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup csssccceseereeeeeees 5 1 About Express Setipinna fue ioc ae id ors aed ects ee a PE ee tad xen eee we BR 5 2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 sccescssssssssecseeseceeesecsaeeecsecseesecaeeseceaeaeeseeneseeesaeceeeaecaeeeeeneeeees 5 3 Installation NotiGes i scachstesd conn niie aati ab E ach E a eae 5 3 The Plow Ot Setups ae er ctl He eee Rote dee teehee ee ser een ce 5 8 Installing the Windows Server 2003 c cesccessesseceseceeeceeesecaeecseeeneecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenreneeneenaees 5 9 Installing and Setting Device Drivers c eeecccesccesesesecssecseeeseeeeceeeeeeenseensecnseceaeenseeaeeneeenes 5 13 Setting for Solving Problems 2 cncciesvegeecceieiescess ewes eescenssiags r E each REE N E 5 22 Installing Maintenance Utilities sisene it es e ie E SEE K EEE EE a 5 26 Updating the System Installing Service Pack s ssessessesessersssseesessteresseserseesersessrenesseeessee 5 27 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccecsceesceesceseceseceseeeseesecnseceseeeeeneeenes 5 27 Exceptional Setup inre e eE estan ney ave E EEE E E aehn
165. change the configuration of the system by adding or removing hardware or Operating system software components or repair the system you must run the system update again Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 11 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section please refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhances throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run DXSETUP EXE in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT W2
166. ck on Setup with left mouse button and click Make OEM DISK and then for Windows Server 2003 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Installing Windows Server 2003 E 7 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 1 2 3 Turn on the system power Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again If the RAID controller including embedded HostRAID feature or SCSI controller is installed in the system press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is displayed Ascreen with a solid blue background is displayed
167. click Intel R PROSet Wired on the Control Panel dialog box The Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box appears 2 Put the mouse cursor on Intel R PRO 1000 MT Dual Port Network Connection in the list and right click Pull down menu appears 3 Select Add to Team and then click Create New Team The Teaming Wizard dialog box appears Select Adapter Fault Tolerance or Adaptive Load Balancing and click Next Check the adapter to join the team and click Next Click Finish The setup will go back to Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box so click OK 8 Restart the system NO Or e 5 42 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F 75 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK
168. click Use 8 Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration NOTE If you do not use disk array controller go on the next step If a Disk array controller is connected to the server or the HostRAID is enabled the Configure RAID dialog box appears Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click OK When the dialog box is closed the Express setup automatically performs the RAID configuration creating Maintenance partition and installing several utilities 9 Select the installing Operating system Select Windows from the menu 10 11 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 37 Select the Windows family Select Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server category NOTE If you select Skip at step 8 this menu does not appear Go on the step 13 Next Basic Information wizard appears Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next After that click Next Back or Help on the screen to continue Modify the parameters each time if necessary IMPORTANT Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally required size If you select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration the information included in the first partition excluding maintenance partition will all be formatted and deleted The information included in the other partition will be retained In the fi
169. connected during the installation the file system will not be converted normally Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 4100MB Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 1MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB IMB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 4100MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 1MB Application Size 5381MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into mult
170. connection Refer to HostRAID Setup Card for details of migration To create a RAID array 1 Select RAID 1 on the Select RAID Type window RAID O High Performance No Fault Tolerance RAID 1 Fault Tolerance RAID 10 Fault Tolerance High Performance Use the cursor key to move the focus to the desired hard disk drive and determine it by Space and then press Enter A X mark is placed next to the selected hard disk drive AIc 7902 A at slot 00 02 03 00 RAID 1 Select RAID members Product ATLAS10K4_146SCA ATLAS10K4_147SCA MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_148SCA Select one of the options in RAID 1 Build Option window and press Enter Available options are as follows Create new RAID 1 Copy from X to Y Copy from Y to X Create new RAID 1 Default Copy from X to Y Copy data from the disk of ID X to that of ID Y Copy from Y to X Copy data from the disk of ID Y to that of ID X Configuring Your Server 4 39 IMPORTANT m To migrate the boot disk that contains an OS refer to the Migration in NEC Express5800 Windows m Make sure the copy source and copy destination If they are incorrect the data will no longer be restored 3 Enter the desired RAID Name in Assign RAID Name window IMPORTANT m RAID Name must be unique and up to 15 characters are acceptable m Ifa valid partition information or a boot block is detected in the selected hard disk driv
171. consumption maximum 470 VA 465 W Environmental Temperature 10 to 35 C operating 10 to 55 C non operating storage requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Others NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported NEC ESMPRO provided in the standard configuration Excluding the front bezel A 2 Specifications NEC Express5800 120Rf 1 Item SATA fixed hard disk drive model N8100 1059F N8100 1060F N8100 1123F N8100 1124F CPU Type Intel Xeon processor Clock Cache 3 20DGHz 3 60GHz 3 20GHz 3 80GHz 1MB 2MB 2MB 2MB Standard 1 Maximum 2 Chipset E7520 800MHz Memory Standard 1GB 512MBx2 Maximum 16GB The standard DIMM must be replaced Expansion unit 2 DIMMs 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB Expansion times 3 times Memory module SDRAM DIMM Low Profile DDR2 400 Buffered Type Error check ECC Graphics VRAM ATI RADEON 7000 VRAM 16MB Hard disk maximum Auxiliary Floppy disk standard 3 5 inch drive x 1 input Hard disk standard None device 500 GB 250 GB x 2 CD ROM standard ATAPI interface x 1 Load on tray type x24 speed Hard disk drive bay Slots 2 RAID RAIDO RAID1 Additional PCI X 64 bit 133MHz 1 slot slot PCI X 64 bit 66MHz 1 slot low profile LAN interface 1000Base T 100Base TX 10Base T 2 ports External Keyboard mo
172. cribed earlier in this chapter The drive letter of the re installed system may differ from the one of the previous system If you need to modify the drive letter modify it according to the Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Installing Windows Server 2003 E 13 Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following procedure 1 Click Start menu right click My Computer and specify Manage to start Computer Management N Specify the Disk Management in the left side of the window Right click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the Change Drive Letter and Path Click Yes Choose the Assign a drive letter and specify the drive letter you want to assign Click OK NO Se e If the following message appears click Yes Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no longer run Are you sure you want to change this drive letter 8 Close the Computer Management E 14 Installing Windows Server 2003 Updating the System Installing Service Pack IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 CD ROM which contains Service Pack 1 to your system you do not have to apply Service Pack again To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures 1 Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account whic
173. cted in DIMM group 3 None Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Mass __ Disable initialization of the optional device Storage Controller in slot n n slot number expansion ROM by using the BIOS SETUP utility see Chapter 4 H W Configuration of BMC is corrupted Update BMC F W Configuration by configuration tool Refer to BMC configuration manual Update BMC firmware according to BMC Online Update in Chapter 6 by using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 8 8 Troubleshooting Processor 1 Processor 2 O een E wee Cr a i a H Cc DIMM 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 3 DIMM 4 DIMM 5 Group 3 DIMM 6 DIMM 7 Group 4 DIMM 8 Group 1 Group 2 Beep Codes Troubleshooting 8 9 If an error occurs during the POST the server beeps indicating the type of error Each number indicates the number of short beeps and a hyphen indicates a pause For example the beep interval 1 5 2 2 indicates 1 beep pause 2 beeps pause 2 beeps pause and 3 beeps notifying that no processor is detected on the mother board Beep code Description Recommended action 1 2 Option ROM initialization 1 Check if the optional add in card is properly error installed 2 Run the
174. d Contexts O Add To Existing Log File O Create Crash Dump File For more information on each function above refer to Online Help Click OK 5 26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Monitor Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble To utilize Network Monitor you need to restart the system after the installation has completed so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur 1 Point to Settings from Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 3 Click Add Remove Windows Component The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears 4 Check the Management and Monitoring Tools check box of the component ON and click Next 5 Ifthe setup asks to install the disk insert Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into CD ROM drive and click OK 6 Click Complete in the Windows Component Wizard dialog box 7 Click Close in the Add Remove Application dialog box 8 Close the Control Panel dialog box To start Network Monitor point to Program Administrative Tools and click Network Monitor For information on how to operate Network Monitor refer to Online Help Installing Maintenance Utilities Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 for installi
175. d jumper on system board refer to Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this chapter Option Parameter Description Your Setting Set Supervisor Up to eight When the lt Enter gt key is pressed the Password alphanumerics user is prompted for a password sector Write Protect Password on boot Disabled Disables or enables password entry Enabled on boot Fixed disk boot Normal Will write protect the boot sector of the hard drive to prevent viruses from corrupting the drive under DOS if set to write protect Secure Mode Disabled Set the period from no input from the Timer 1 min keyboard or mouse to the point at 2 min which the system enters into the 5 min secure mode 10 min 20 min 1 hr 2 hr Security Hot Key L Specify the hot key to invoke secure CTRL ALT Z mode features Pressing the assigned key along with Ctrl and Alt invoke secure mode This option is enabled when User Password is set Secure Mode Boot Disabled Specify whether the system boots in Enabled secure mode This option is enabled when User Password is set Video Blanking Disabled Specify whether to turn off the Enabled monitor when secure mode is activated Floppy Write Disabled Controls access to the floppy disk Protect Enabled drive during the secure mode Power Switch Disabled Enables or disables the POWER Inhibit Enabled switch If Enabled is selected power off with the POWER switch becomes unavailable aft
176. d see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 11 Run the BIOS SETUP utility and select Yes for Advanced Reset Configuration Data This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details Removal Remove a PCI board in reverse order of the installation steps 9 38 Upgrading Your Server RAID Controller Board Using the optional RAID controller allows you to use hard disk drives in the device bays of the server and those in the optional expansion disk cabinet in the disk array configuration IMPORTANT m The disk array controller board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the Server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the disk array controller board Do not touch the disk array controller board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the disk array controller board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Making hard disk drives in the disk array configuration or changing the RAID level initializes hard disk drives If the hard disk drive to be configured in the array has your valuable data stored make sure to make a backup copy of the data in another hard disk drive before installing the disk array controller board and configuring the array m The disk array configuration requires at least two hard disk drives m Use hard dis
177. d to restore the backup data m Start of Utilities With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER you can start the following utilities installed in the maintenance partition System Management System Diagnostics Maintenance Partition Update m Chassis Identify This function can distinguish the machine with the LED or buzzer of the machine This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack Troubleshooting 8 37 RESETTING THE SERVER If the server halts before starting the OS press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete This restarts the server IMPORTANT Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process To reset the server when it is not frozen make sure that no processing is in progress 8 38 Troubleshooting FORCED SHUTDOWN Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server the POWER switch does not turn off the server or resetting does not work Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds The power is forcibly turned off To turn on the power back again wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power forced shutdown POWER LED POWER switch IMPORTANT If the remote power on function is used cycle the power once to load the OS and turn off the power again in the normal way Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server This chapter describes internal opti
178. des the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO Agent for the server NOTE For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO system configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO see Chapter 6 Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the operating system you install Ask your service representative for details OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY The Off line Maintenance Utility is used for maintenance and fault analysis of the server This utility is usually used by the service representative Refer to Chapter 8 for details SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC UTILITY The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to detect hardware failures See Chapter 7 for details NEC DianaScope The NEC DianaScope is a software for the remote management of the NEC Express5800 series The NEC DianaScope can control the managed server even if operating system is not running on the managed server See Chapter 6 and online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER General Description 2 29 USING YOUR SERVER This section describes basic operations of the server including how to use devices such as the floppy disk drive and the CD ROM drive See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk CD ROM and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse Front Bezel Remove the front bezel to power on off the server to access the floppy disk drive and CD ROM drive and to install remove hard disk
179. ding to Boot Priority 4 40 Configuring Your Server Deleting Arrays To delete an array IMPORTANT Back up the data in the hard disk drive of an array before you delete it Otherwise all data on the array is lost Deleted arrays cannot be restored 1 On the main menu move cursor to select the array you wish to delete and press Enter 0 dj Verity Vendor Product Striped RO ADAPTEC raid 109GB Optimal 2 Press D on the screen shown below Some characters may not be displayed correctly when console redirection is used It is no problem on operation Ignore it and press D Vendor Prod us Striped RO MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_146SCA Optimal Striped RO MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_147SCA Optimal Hard Drive MAXTOR ATLAS10K4_148SCA Free 3 Select Yes for the message Delete Array and press Enter Selecting No returns to the main menu without deleting any array Configuring Your Server 4 41 lt RAIDO gt Deleting information window appears Select the hard disk drive you wish to delete its partition or boot block or select None then press Enter lt Example gt Drive ID 0 Data in drive 0 is entirely erased Data in drive is reserved Drive ID 1 Data in drive 1 is entirely erased Data in drive 0 is reserved Drive ID 0 amp 1 All the data in both drives is erased None Array is deleted but the data is reserved in both drives lt Other than RAIDO gt The Deleting information w
180. disk and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed Creating invalid delete mirror volume can be operated from Disk Management in Computer Management Connecting MO Device If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Connecting Hard Disk Drive Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS If you create multiple logical drives in your system refer to Re installing the operation system when multiple logical drives exist Appendix D 5 6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Creating Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 2900MB Only Windows Server 2003 3500MB Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack1 4400MB Windows Server 2003 Service Pack CD ROM Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file si
181. dows Server 2003 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning m Install the OS before connecting another hard disk drive m Ifyou create multiple logical drives in your system refer to Reinstalling the operation system when multiple logical drives exist Appendix D 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server 3 Press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The system boots from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts 4 Click Express Setup 5 The message Do you want to use the parameters file in order to set up the Express server or workstation appears If you want to use the parameters file click Yes If not click No 6 NOTE appears Click Confirm after reading that NOTE If some operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive already the message which asks if you continue the installation appears 5 10 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 7 Ifyou select Yes at step 5 place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the server If not go on the next step NOTE If you set the floppy disk at this step do not remove the floppy disk from the server until the message as removing the floppy disk appears Using the existing Configuration Disk The parameters files in the floppy disk is li
182. e Completing the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box below appears Click Finish lt In the case of Windows Server 2003 which has not installed SevicePack1 gt 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select the Search for the best driver in these locations and check the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and click Next Copying of the driver is completed and the Completing the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box below appears Click Finish 5 20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver For the graphics accelerator driver the use of a remote KVM console that installs the advanced N8115 02 remote management card is supported by the standard
183. e Eject button in the similar way in setting the CD ROM to make the tray go out If the access LED is lit in orange the CD is being accessed Confirm that the access LED is not lit before pressing the Eject button As shown in the figure below hold the tray with a hand and take the end of the CD ROM lightly by the fingers of another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the center of the tray to remove the CD ROM from the tray General Description 2 41 After taking out the CD ROM return the tray into the drive When you fail to eject the CD ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD ROM from the server follow the procedure below eT Emergency hole 1 Press the POWER switch to power off the server The POWER LED goes off 2 Insert a metal pin of approximately 1 2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute into the emergency hole on the right front of the CD ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray is ejected IMPORTANT Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break m Ifthe above procedure does not let you take out the CD ROM contact your service representative 3 Hold the tray and pull it out Take out the CD ROM Push the tray back into position 2 42 General Description NOTE Use of the CD ROM Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD ROM for the server For the disk which does
184. e bezel insert the key in the lock and turn the lock counterclockwise until it stops about a quarter turn The bezel is now unlocked and can be opened again To lock the bezel insert the key in the lock Turn the lock clockwise until it stops about a quarter turn The bezel is now locked and cannot be opened Software Locks via the BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the system Once the security measures are enabled you can access the system only after you enter the correct password s For example m Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and mouse after a specified time out period 1 to 120 minutes m Set and enable a supervisor password m Set and enable a user password m Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel reset and power switches m Activate a hot key combination to enter secure mode quickly m Disable writing to the diskette drive when secure mode is set m Disable access to the boot sector of the operating system hard disk drive 2 24 General Description Using Passwords You can set either the user password the supervisor password or both passwords If only the user password is set you Must enter the user password to enter BIOS Setup m Must enter the user password to boot the server if Password on Boo
185. e installed in the server 9 52 Upgrading Your Server Removal 1 2 See section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare IMPORTANT The remote management card logic monitors and logs system voltage changes When removing the RMC from the motherboard you may experience a 3 4 second delay from the time your system powering down Pull out the server from the rack 3 Open the logic cover 4 Open the levers on the both sides of the RMC connector to unlatch the RMC Remove the RMC from the connector Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that menus related to the RMC are not displayed in the Server menu See Chapter 4 for details Run BIOS SETUP utility and select Yes for Reset Configuration Data in the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details Override installation of NEC ESMPRO Agent if installed To correct the system information and event log from the management PC NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed in the server Appendix A Specifications NEC Express5800 120Rf 1 Item SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model N8100 N8100 N8100 N8100 N8100 N8100 1056F 1057F 1058F 1121F 1122F 1099F CPU Type Intel Xeon processor Clock Cache 3 20DGHZz 3 40GHZ 3 60GHz 3 20GHZz 3 40GHz 3 80
186. e list box at left and press Delete Then the drive will be erased from the list box at right 00 Maxtor 6Y120M0 111 7GB CE gri Array OO Maxtor 6Y120M0 i ci 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 74 5G6B 01 Maxtor 6Y120M0 74 5GB NOTES Up to two hard disk drives can be connected to the onboard SATA connector of the server RAID configuration requires two or more hard disk drives Therefore select two hard disk drives displayed in the list m The grayed out hard disk drive indicates the disk with no usable disk or uninitialized disk Press Esc several times to exit this menu See Initializing Hard Disk Drives described later 5 Press Enter Array Properties for detailed setting of RAID appears 6 Select the desired RAID level using the cursor key and press Enter Select either RAIDO striping or RAID1 mirroring Array Pr pties Array Type z RAID O Stripe RAID 1 Mirror Array Label Array Size Stripe Size create RAID via Configuring Your Server 4 49 7 Enter the volume label for the RAID drive to be created and press Enter Array Properties 8 For RAIDO select the desired stripe size and press Enter Available stripe sizes are 16 32 and 64 KB default NOTE NEC recommends that you use the default 64KB for stripe Size Array Properties 9 Select the creation method from Create RAID via and press Enter Array Properties 4 50 Configurin
187. e or copy target disk drive a warning message will be displayed Select Yes to continue creating an array No to terminate m Take sufficient care not to select the proper hard disk drive or copy destination drive If not the data will not be restored 4 The message Do you want to make this array as bootable to prompt you to specify the boot priority of the new array appears Select YES to specify or NO to ignore and then press Enter NOTE The boot priority can be changed after the arrays have been created To change priority see Boot Priority described earlier 5 Select Yes for the message Create Array and press Enter Selecting No terminates creating an array and returns to the main menu 6 Select Yes for the message Are you sure and press Enter Selecting No terminates creating an array and returns to the main menu When an array has been created build operation starts IMPORTANT Be sure to complete the Build process Do not stop the process by pressing Esc OS detects only an array of which build process has been completed and its status is Optimal In addition no OS can be installed in that array 7 Press Esc when the message Build Completed is displayed to return to the main menu NOTE On the main menu make sure that Optimal is indicated for the status of the created array IMPORTANT After creating an array set the boot priority for the created array accor
188. e same time This improves disk access performance compared with using a single hard disk drive IMPORTANT m RAIDO does not have data redundancy When a hard disk drive failure occurs data cannot be restored m Logical capacity of the array becomes a multiple of the connected hard disk drive m RAID mirroring Stores the data being saved to one hard disk dive to another hard disk drive This method is called mirroring When storing data onto one hard disk drive the same data is simultaneously stored onto another hard disk drive When a hard disk drive becomes faulty the one with the same data can be used This provides operation without the system going down IMPORTANT m RAIDI reads or writes data to from the two hard disk drives at the same time The disk access performance is lower than the single disk m Logical capacity of the array is equal to one hard disk drive connected 4 30 Configuring Your Server Installing the Hard Disk Drives Install the two or more SCSI hard disk drives to your server Refer to Chapter 9 for detail IMPORTANT Use two hard disk drives of the same revolution In addition use two hard disk drives of the same capacity if you are going to configure RAID1 Enabling RAID Feature by SCSISelect Utility The two or more hard disk drives installed can be used either as a single disk or a RAID drive To configure a disk drives as RAID drive you must specify the hard disk
189. e scutes eats 5 28 Microsoft Windows 2000 iisoai eres io E EE o E E EEEE EE TEE A 5 29 Installation NONE E E ecg totes E EE ET 5 29 Lhe Flow of Setups ATE EE A E E E E et ie 5 34 Installing the Windows 2000 c cesccesscsssceseceseceecseeeseeeseeseceseeeseenseceaeseeeeseceaeeaeensecsaeeaeeenes 5 35 Installing and Setting Device Drivers seseseesseeesssreeessesersresetstssteresstsresreseesteseeresseeerssesees 5 39 Setting for Solving Problems cccceccesceesecesecsseesceeeeeeeeeeceeseceseceaeeaecaecaeecaeeeseeeeeeneeeereerees 5 45 Installing Maintenance Utilities ceceeccescceseceecesecceceeeeseeeseeneeeeesseenseceseeeseceaeenseeeeeaeeees 5 48 Updating the System Installing Service Pack cceeceeseeeseeeeceneceneceseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeens 5 49 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccecseeseeesceeeceeeceseceseeseceseenseceeeneeenes 5 49 Exceptional Setup cei cccccscssedeecesehe i idesdceecivnscvadete E EREE EE R A RE a 5 50 HostRAID 3 2 nents ein Sn ein aren E aes ae eh ee eee E a 5 51 Overview of HostRAID rniii eee RE AE ANE RA E E a i 5 51 NOTES a tives E ERT es ete aie ENE T E N EOE ee 5 52 SCSI HostRAID Setup FOW 5 ccccccc cccesscccecveceseececcscccenscecuescestcvssedvaceatecedcvededvacestacddeveeeieasvecss 5 54 SATA HostRAID Setup FIOW sinceris sse i E EEE E sE Rina 5 55 Migration of Hard Disk Drive Migration ccscccsseesseesceesceeeceeecesecaecaeceecaeesaeeaeeeaeeeaes
190. e standard start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Control Panel Click Network Connections and Click Local Area Connection The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu 2 Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears 3 Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 The Intel R PROSet for Wired Connections dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu point to Control Panel and click Intel R PROSet Wired The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu point to Settings and click Control Panel 2 Double click Intel R PROSet Wired on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click Apply and click OK Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection Installing t
191. e system press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is displayed A screen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed 5 When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready 6 Insert the Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter SATA Model A list of mass storage devices is displayed SCSI Model Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Win2000 and press Enter Then it returns to the screen of Procedure 5 Installing Windows 2000 F 7 7 Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1 02 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SCSI is installed Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver for Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SATA is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 1 Controller Driver When N8103 80F board is installed
192. e warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server Do not intentionally remove or damage any of the labels If you find any labels totally partially removed or illegible due to damage contact your sales representative ESMA WARNING HEAVY ITEM HAEN EDL DROE RAPA DicHBYORWS2LA e MLECHOT FAL TGE overs To avoid the risk of 7 personal injury or damage to the unit move the unit with at least two or more people ATH LBM BAA RM RFET BRES HE 2SAD LETT Eg ON PCIi KORD IB REDI Y Zt4 KOZENE HA TREL TIC ay have Broken a concto Read Ihe corresponding part ofthe USER S GUIDE when naling or roving PCI board may 243 201192 001 A 1 i HY 80 PCI RAE HSU THARR AART WEA MTEF GUTES SRE in oO Ee he REAR FRONT i A CAUTION A 3 amp CAUTION AA ATI aOR ALERT I ICI LY MORE HBRECERL TST FILEALT PAL BY ht 1 TRICRATMSMNSASIELTC RAW DET RPRTSEAELO ESU components may become very hot buring system operation give ample time to llow cooling as woll as use n when handling internal components immedietely after powering down Some internal components may still on battery power Refer to instructi
193. earthquake resistant construction for the rack refer to the manual attached to the rack or contact you service representative Install the server on a rack confirming to the EIA standard for the server to be used Do not use the server with installed on any other rack than standard EIA 19 inch rack or without the installation on a proper rack Failure to follow these instructions may cause the server to operate incorrectly and or personal injury or damages of surrounding devices to occur Contact your service representative for the racks available for the server 1 4 Notes on Using Your Server A CAUTION Keep water or foreign matter away from the server clips enter the server Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock a fire or a failure of the server When such things accidentally enter the server immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Do not disassemble the server Contact your service representative A Do not let any form of liquid water etc or foreign matter e g pins or paper Notes on Using Your Server 1 5 Power Supply and Power Cord Use A WARNING AX 9 Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand Do not disconnect connect the plug while your hands are wet Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Failure to follow
194. ed BIOS Setup item values to CMOS Exit Discarding Changes Exit leaving CMOS unmodified User is prompted if any of the setup fields ware modified Load Setup Defaults Load default values for all BIOS Setup items IMPORTANT This option sets SATA RAID Enabled in the Advanced menu to Disable If the SATA hard disk drives are installed in your server and the onboard SATA RAID feature is used change the parameter of the SATA RAID Enabled from Disable to Enable before exiting BIOS Setup Discard Changes Read the previous values of the all BIOS Setup items from CMOS Save Changes Write all BIOS Setup item values to CMOS Configuring Your Server 4 19 CONFIGURING MOTHER BOARD JUMPERS With the pre installed SETUP utility you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server against access from unauthorized users When you forget the passwords however you may want clear them The following describes how to clear these passwords You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server IMPORTANT Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory set configuration data After clearing CMOS you must run the BIOS SETUP utility and execute the following menus to reconfigure your mother board Load Setup Defaults in the Exit menu Memory Retest of Memory Configuration in the Advanced menu Processor Retest of Processor Settings in the Main menu SATA RAID Enable in
195. eed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click OK Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems in Chapter 5 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 13 Optional Network Board Driver If you want to utilize optional Network Board N8104 86 88 111 install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM In case of utilizing N8104 86 88 111 CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K3AMD NS1 PRO100 WS03_32E In case of utilizing N8104 112 103 113 109 115 CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K3AMD NS1 PRO1000 WS03_32E If the procedure of installation is not clear refer to the installation procedure described in the section Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver Start Device Manager 2 Click Network adapters and double click Network Adapter Name Network Adapter Name Properties appears NOTE Intel R PRO 1000 is the name of On Board adapt
196. eep the CD ROM in a CD ROM case when not in use Tape Media The following describes data handling with the DAT DLT or AIT optionally available for the server Saving your valuable data When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape you should save them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error as well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss Three generation data management NEC recommends that you should employ three generation data management for data storage Three generation data management uses three cartridge tapes A B and C You save data to tape A on the first day tape B on the second day tape C on the third day tape A on the forth day andso on That is you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C Other Precautions B 5 This enables you for example to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error Also when both tapes B and C make a read error you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A Keyboard The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols IMPORTANT Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard m The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adju
197. efer to About the upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2 for details NOTE Please do the upgrade installation after deleting the graphics accelerator driver Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003 1 2 3 Power on the system and start Windows 2000 Log on as an administrator Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Then Select an operation dialog will appear NOTE If the Select an operation dialog box does not appear start SETUP EXE from CD ROM drive Select Install Windows Server 2003 Then a dialog box asks to select the upgrade or clear installation Select Upgrade recommended and click the Next Follow the messages and continue The system will automatically restart after copying the files NOTE You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM in CD ROM drive If the RAID controller or SCSI controller is installed in the system press F6 while a message Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver is on the screen IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed E 10 10 11 Installing Windows Server 2003 When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the followin
198. eie hanna tieialed 2 28 WISIN GY OUT SOnV ele sos E cred EA E E E soeves Lies ds A OURS boitas haw east 2 29 BrOnt BeZe lies cei soait E ts a Sek E EAE EE E hvac sids Svea avoeues E 2 29 POWERS Witch ee eaea eaa aaae atcevseten denser oesseecesdisecses dosseden douse cd sdeesdsdavedzestovententasedioseeser 2 31 Identification of Servers UID Switch ccecccescceceesseesseeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeaeenaeenaecneecseeenes 2 36 Floppy Disk Drtve esses E E A ba ahaa E SSE aeons tabs te tas boats 2 37 CDAROM Dri Ve ae a a AAEE EE AAAA EERE A A AT AR A devsvuses 2 39 Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ccccccceseesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenseeesnaeeeseeeseeeeeeneeees 3 1 Setup FLOW arre een E E EE E E O T E EO A E e eagle 3 2 Selecting Server Site eE duce O gees sage A T O E oeeeghe 3 3 Unpacking the Systeme oE A R E ERO A R 3 5 Inst llingithe Servet onrera EON O E E R NEEE 3 6 Restricted Access LOCati Onis misa grinin aeeie nE aa aea aa ea raa E ESTEE 3 7 ESD Precaution e ne ean a a a tet aa a aa a a Be che aT 3 7 Checkins Components eesse ana e a a a wae 3 7 Required Tools roa ei a a a a a e E a a aea a E a 3 7 Installation Procedure for NEC Rack Third Vendor s Rack ss sssssesssesessseseesesseeessseseesresersessee 3 8 Removing the Server from the Rack ASSeOMDLY c cccccesssesseeeseeesceeceseceaecaeceaeeaecseeeneeenes 3 14 Connecting Peripheral Devices yay i s ccpcecieadveuccndscetues seta e e a a TE 3 16
199. en the installation has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of manual D 8 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical drives exist Before Re installing the Operation System Be sure to make backup copies before re installing the operation system just in case Re installing the Operation System 1 Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual 2 Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following message appears The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume Confirm the proper drive letter is assigned and then continue the setup 3 Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this chapter The drive letter of the re installed system may differ from the one of the previous system If you need to modify the drive letter modify it according to the Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 9 Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Be careful that the drive l
200. ence of timeout and OS boot is retried up to three times Then the boot is tried from the service partition for three times The failure in the third boot causes the system to stop booting If Always Reset is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried repeatedly If no service partition exists in the system OS boot is retried repeatedly from the system partition Thermal Disabled Specify whether to enable or disable the Sensor Enabled thermal sensor monitoring function If a thermal error is detected with this item being set to Enabled the system stops at the end of POST Post Error Disabled Specify whether to stop the POST once at Pause Enabled the end of POST if an error occurs during the POST 4 16 Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting AC LINK Stay Off Specify the state of power when the AC Last State power to the server is turn off once and Power On then on Power On 0 255 Specify the power on delay time within the Delay Time range between 0 and 255 seconds The Sec time specified is valid when Power On or Last State is specified for AC LINK Platform Event Disabled This item becomes meaningless when the Filtering Enabled notification feature of remote management card RMC is enabled Factory set IMPORTANT To power on the server from the UPS Uninterrupt
201. er All other names show the Optional Network Board 3 Click Driver tab and click Update Driver Hardware Update Wizard appears 4 Select the Install from a list or specific location Advanced radio button and click Next 5 Select the Search for the best driver in these locations radio button and check off the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box 6 Check the Include this location in the search check box and when using N8104 86 111 specify CD ROM driveletter WINNT W2K3AMD NS1 PROLOO WS03_32E And when using N8104 112 103 113 109 115 specify CD ROM driveletter WINNT W2K3AMD NS1 PRO1000 WS03_32E Then click Next 7 Click Finish D 14 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT Adaptive Load Balancing ALB Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming
202. er 2003 R2 ecceccessceseseeceseeesceeeceeeeseeeseeaeceeeeeeneeees E 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 cccecccesscssscessceseeesceecesecsaecaecsaecaeecaeseaeeeseseeeeeenseeneeenteesaeenees E 5 Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER saec E 5 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ccccecccesccesecsceeseeeseeeseeesceecesecnsecaeceaeenseceesaeenses E 7 Upgrade Installation 2 cccccc3 sec cesecsccesceteedetedccectveeciededescaecacgeieeistaeecscnvinceeceaseestcveseteedeviiesteesdetss E 9 Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives ccccesccesccesceseceeecesecesecesecseecseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeerenseens E 12 Updating the System Installing Service Pack 0 eccecccesceesececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeneeeereeeeens E 14 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings cccccccscccsssesseeseesceesceeeceeeceseceaecaecaeeaeensesneeeneeenes E 15 PROSetyietetcce cite aide ee oleh Hanan arene ei eal ees E 15 Network Drivetrain aE E EE EEE ai E 16 Re install the Network Driver isn ceicnsiiinrein iei E EE aa E 17 Graphics Accelerator Driver cc c cc setscccscscinteatetescndcessedetceec ecteediaicadecedcaesetvaceusecevcesseevedesces E 17 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F sssesssssesesssssersessresessrsressesrseseesesseeeessesees E 18 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 ssssssssseessesersssserssseessssrsresseserseeseesessreeessesees E 19 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N
203. er 4 2 26 General Description Feature Description Control access to the system other than BIOS Setup set user password To control access to using the system set a user password and enable it through Setup To disable a password change it to a blank entry in the Change Password menu of the User Password Option menu found in the Security Subsystem Group To clear the password if you cannot access Setup change the Clear Password jumper see Chapter 4 Boot without keyboard Specify the boot sequence The system can boot with or without a keyboard During POST before the system completes the boot sequence the BIOS automatically detects and tests the keyboard if it is present and displays a message The sequence that you specify in setup will determine the boot order If secure mode is enabled a user password is set then you will be prompted for a password before the server fully boots If secure mode is enabled and the Secure Boot Mode option is also enabled the server will fully boot but will require a password before accepting any keyboard or mouse input General Description 2 27 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The CD ROM that comes with the server contains a setup utility called NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are To install the Operating System Express Setup helps you to install the Windows Operating System See Chapter 5 To diagnose the
204. er OS boot up Forced shut down also becomes unavailable Forced shut down is a feature to shut down by pressing the POWER switch for at least four seconds Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 15 Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting System System Management submenu is Management displayed Console Console Redirection submenu is displayed Redirection Assert NMI on Disabled Specify whether to support PCI PERR or PERR Enabled not Assert NMI on Disabled Specify whether to support PCI SERR or SERR Enabled not FRB 2 Policy Disable FRB2 Set the FRB level 2 timer Timer Retry 3 Times Boot Monitoring Disabled Specify whether to enable or disable the 5 Minutes boot monitoring function on booting or 10 Minutes select the time limit for timeout 15 Minutes To use this function install NEC ESMPRO 20 Minutes Agent Set this item to Disabled if the system is booted from OS without ES installation of NEC ESMPRO Agent 35 Minutes 40 Minutes 45 Minutes 50 Minutes 55 Minutes 60 Minutes Boot Monitoring Retry 3 Times Specify the processing at the occurrence of Policy Retry Service Boot Always Reset timeout during boot monitoring If Retry 3 times is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried up to three times If Retry Service Boot is selected the system is reset after the occurr
205. er for Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions the use of a remote KVM console that installs the advanced N8115 02 remote management card is supported by the standard A special driver need not be installed 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run SETUP EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K3AMD VIDEO SETUP EXE 4 Follow the message to continue the installation 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 56 75 95 N8190 1 26 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 56 75 95 N8 190 126 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically D 16 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Installing RAID Controller Driver N8103 80F 81F To additionally install the N8103 80F 81F in a system containing Windows Server 2003 connect the controller and take the following steps to install the driver 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320 1 2 which Device Manager lists Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears
206. er in the Secure Mode Inthe Secure Mode the POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility Troubleshooting 8 13 The keyboard or mouse fails to operate Q Is the cable properly connected You must use the provided keyboard mouse branch cable Y cable for this server Make sure that the provided cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is powered not applicable to USB devices Power of the server first and connect it properly Q Is BIOS configuration correct The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Check the settings with the BIOS SETUP utility lt Menus to check Advanced Numlock gt Are the server drivers installed Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse drivers are installed These drivers are installed along with the OS Some OS s allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct O Is the server in the Secure Mode In the Secure Mode the keyboard and mouse are disabled To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility 8 14 Troubleshooting Fail to access read or write
207. er software package which is sold separately from NEC but refer to this document when you install Windows 2000 on this model m After completing Express Setup see Setting for Solving Problems described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as Specifying Memory Dump Installing on the Mirrored Volume If you want to install Windows 2000 on the volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed Creating invalid delete mirror volume can be operated from Disk Management in Computer Management Connecting MO Device If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Connecting Hard Disk Drive Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS If you create multiple logical drives in your system refer to Re installing the operation system when multiple logical drives exist Appendix E 5 32 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About Maintenance Partition the area displayed as MAINTE_P The maintenance partition for server ma
208. erating System with Express Setup describes how to install the operating system Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities describes how to install the utilities for the server It also includes a description on using the attached CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Chapter 7 Maintenance provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server Chapter 8 Troubleshooting contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor optional memory optional add in cards hard disk drives peripheral devices and power supply Appendix A Specification provides specifications for your server Appendix B Other Precautions provides supplementary notes on using the server Appendix C IRQ and I O Port Address provides a list of factory set IRQs and I O port addresses assigned Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions See Chapter 5 for details Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003 describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup
209. erent order from that described above depending on OS or disk array BIOS utility Check the slot location of PCI device by PCI bus number device number and function number shown in the table below Bus number Device number Function number Onboard NIC1 Onboard NIC2 Slot 1C Onboard SCSI Ch A external Onboard SCSI Ch B internal Slot 1B WNNNNN NWWN Ro OF The bus number may be 5 or greater depending on the board installed in Slot 1B m Set Disabled for the optional ROM of a LAN device not to be booted by using the BIOS SETUP utility m If an additional LAN device is installed it is hard to push the catch of the connector with your finger that is connected to the LAN port Disconnect the connector pushing the catch with a standard screwdriver At this time be very careful for the screwdriver not to damage the LAN port or other ports m Ifa bootable PCI board e g a disk array controller SCSI controller or LAN card is additionally installed the boot priority is changed After the additional installation start the BIOS SETUP utility select Boot and set the new boot priority m Contact your service representative for the acceptable optional PCI board Upgrading Your Server 9 35 Installation Take the following steps to install a PCI board on the riser card IMPORTANT The full height riser card is equipped with an insulator black to protect PCI boards Do not remove the insulator and handle it care
210. erver is properly installed If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions consult with your service representative immediately Take notes on LED indications of the server and alarm indications on the display unit before consultation which may provide a significant help to your sale agent Notes on Using Your Server 1 15 Advice for Health The longer you keep using the computer equipment the more you become tired which may cause disorders of your body When you use a computer observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired Good Working Posture You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer e You sit on a chair with your back straight e Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard e You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height You have good working posture as described in the above when no part of your body is under excess strain in other words when your muscles are most relaxed You have bad posture when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display unit with your face close to the screen Bad working posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight Adjustment of Display Unit Angles Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy
211. es m Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the Server ON Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts a Select Create Support Disk from Tools Select Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Create Support Disk menu Installing Windows 2000 F 5 Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Master Control Menu Master Control Menu runs on the following operating systems Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64 Edition Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Me 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 You can create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Master
212. es if you want to clear the Yes system configuration data during the next boot Automatically reset to No in the next boot NumLock Auto Sets power on Numlock state On Off Memory Processor Error Boot If Halt is selected the boot is Halt stopped when POST error occurs SATA RAID Enable Disabled If enabled the BIOS uses the hard Enabled disk drives connected to the onboard SATA connectors as the RAID drive Factory set Memory Configuration Configuring Your Server 4 9 Option Parameter Description Your Setting System Memory nnn KB Indicates the total capacity of the basic memory View only Extended Memory nnnnnnn KB Indicates the total capacity of the extended memory View only DIMM Group Normal Indicates the current memory status 1 4 Disabled Normal indicates the normal status Not installed Disabled indicates a memory error and Not installed indicates no DIMM installed view only Group 1 indicates DIMMs in DIMM sockets 1 and 2 Group 2 indicates DIMMs in DIMM sockets 3 and 4 Group 3 indicates DIMMs in DIMM sockets 5 and 6 Group 4 indicates DIMMs in DIMM sockets 7 and 8 Memory is interleaved and two DIMMs are used in pair Memory Retest Yes Causes BIOS to retest all memory on the No next boot Extended RAM 1MB 1MB indicates that the memory test is Step 1KB done in the unit of 1MB 1KB indicates Every location that the me
213. ess Setup 5 43 Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver For the graphics accelerator driver the use of a remote KVM console that installs the advanced N8115 02 remote management card is supported by the standard 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run SETUP EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K VIDEO SETUP EXE 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not been found appears select Yes to continue If the dialog message Direct X Ver 8 isn t installed appears select continue to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system USB 2 0 Driver USB 2 0 Driver is pre installed When restoring the system or re installing the system the driver is automatically installed in the process of updating the system 5 44 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Available switch options for Windows 2000 Boot ini file Many different switches will be
214. etter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following procedure 1 Click Start menu right click My Computer and specify Manage to start Computer Management N Specify the Disk Management in the left side of the window Right click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the Change Drive Letter and Path Click Yes Choose the Assign a drive letter and specify the drive letter you want to assign Click OK NO Se e If the following message appears click Yes Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no longer run Are you sure you want to change this drive letter 8 Close the Computer Management D 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Updating the System To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures 1 Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member of the Administrators group 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen 3 Click on Setup with left mouse button and click on Update NEC Express5800 system section Continue your work for system update as the following message Click on Restart Computer to restart the system Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive immediately after clicking on Restart Computer IMPORTANT If you
215. fected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning To prevent a momentary voltage drop an AC uninterruptible power supply UPS unit should be used Notes 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 2 The contents of this User s Guide may be revised without prior notice 3 The contents of this User s Guide shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 4 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this User s Guide If you notice any part unclear incorrect or omitted in this User s Guide contact the sales agent where you purchased this product 5 NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product nor any liability for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this User s Guide regardless of Item 4 6 Ifyou find any missing pages or pages out of order in this manual please contact your dealer for a replacement PREFACE Welcome to the NEC Express5800 120Rf 1 server The NEC Express5800 server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to implement a computer for the next generation With its potential capabilities the server may be used as the workstation PC that configures a client server system and provides high speed processing and superior reliability Read this User s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the se
216. ff Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth oe Ne Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water and squeeze it firmly Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4 Soak a soft cloth in water squeeze it firmly wipe the server with it once again Wipe the server with a dry cloth et er Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth 7 4 Maintenance Cleaning the Interior One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of the interior of the server especially around the mother board Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems As dust acts as a thermal insulator a buildup can prevent proper system cooling Excessive heat will shorten the life of server components Also dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is located For most office environments you probably should clean the server every 12 months For more severe environments clean the interior every 6 months Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover You will need a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tipped no
217. figuration gt PCI Configuration Additional setup gt Peripheral Configuraion menus to configure gt Advanced Chipset Control Memory devices Boot time Diagnostic Screen Disabled Reset Configuration Data No NumLock Coffi SATA RAID Enable Enabled 3 Select Exit gt Exit Saving Changes to save the settings and exit the SETUP utility This completes the setting When the setting has been changed POST will display a message to prompt you to start Array Configuration Utility ACU every time the server is started Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for Adaptec RAID Configuration Utility Start the utility to configure the RAID drive as needed See the description below for details 4 46 Configuring Your Server RAID Configuration by Array Configuration Utility ACU This section describes how to configure the RAID by using the Array Configuration Utility ACU that can be called from POST NOTE You can configure the RAID drive by using Express Setup of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER See Chapter 6 for details Running the Array Configuration Utility ACU To start ACU NOTES m Make sure that the BIOS has been changed according to Enabling RAID Feature by BIOS SETUP Utility m To start the ACU from management PC via serial direct connection or via network see also NEC EXPRESSBUILDER in Chapter 6 Start the server 2 Torun ACU press Ctrl A when prompted by the following message du
218. file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation the file system will not be converted normally Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning Installing Windows 2000 F 3 Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 1000MB Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory
219. fter completing the steps in the manual you can install your Network Operating System If you want to remotely configure the array from a PC client increase array capacity online or monitor statistics on disk and controller activity you must install the array manager provided with your RAID subsystem Increasing array capacity is covered in the documentation shipped with the option Configuring Your Server 4 29 RAID CONFIGURATION This section describes how to use the internal hard disk drives in the disk array RAID configuration To use an external hard disk drive in a disk array the optional disk array controller and the additional disk drive are necessary Refer to the manual of the optional disk array controller or additional external disk drive for details To configure the internal hard disk drives as the disk array drive m For SCSI model configure the three SCSI hard disk drives by using the onboard RAID controller m For SATA model configure the two SATA hard disk drives by using the onboard RAID controller m Configure the hard disk drives by using the optional disk array controller RAID Configuration of SCSI Hard Disk Drive You can configure a disk array RAIDO or RAID1 by using the onboard RAID controller of the server You need up to three SCSI hard disk drives for configuration m RAIDO striping Stores data on two hard disk drives by dividing it striping Both hard disk drives can be accessed at th
220. fully The insulator is not shown in the figures in this manual for simplifying the illustrations NOTES m Each riser card supports low profile or full height PCI boards Before installing a PCI board confirm that the type of the PCI board m When installing a PCI board confirm that the card connector matches the connector of the riser card See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the drive cover and logic cover e O N a Grasp a handle on the riser card assembly and lift straight up and remove the riser card from the server 5 Remove the screw from the riser card and remove the extension slot cover NOTE Keep the removed extension slot cover for future use Extension slot cover Extension slot cover SF S WP Low Profile side Full height side 9 36 Upgrading Your Server 6 Install the PCI board on the riser card Align the PCI board terminal section with the riser card slot and firmly push the PCI board until it is fully seated Insert the end of the PCI board bracket in the frame slot of the riser card Low Profile side Full height side IMPORTANT Do not touch the terminals of the riser cards and PCI boards with your bare hand Fingerprints and dust left on them cause the server to malfunction m Ifyou are unable to install a PCI board cor
221. g Your Server Create RAID via allows you to select between the different creation methods for RAIDO and RAID1 The following table gives examples of when each is appropriate RAID level Create RAID How to create via RAIDO No Init Creates a RAIDO on new drives RAIDO Migrate Adds a new drive to the existing drive that contains data migration The server does not support Migrate feature RAID1 Build Copy the data in the existing drive and creates RAID1 drive RAID Clear Clears all the data in the drive and creates new RAID1 drive RAID1 Quick Init Fastest way to create a RAID1 drive When you start creating RAID a window to select the copy source drive existing drive appears The data in the selected drive is copied to the new drive to configure RAID Note that the data in the destination drive is erased IMPORTANT The server does not support Migrate option NOTES Before adding a new drive to an existing array back up any data contained on the new drive Otherwise all data will be lost If you stop the Build process on a RAID1 from ACU you can only restart it from Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition or Adaptec Storage Manager A RAID created using the Quick Init option may return some data miscompares if you later run a consistency check This is normal and is not a cause for concern The ACU allows you to use drives of different sizes in a RAID1 During a build oper
222. g mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of SCSI adapters will be displayed SATA Model A list of mass storage devices is displayed SCSI Model Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards WinXP Server 2003 A 32 and press Enter If the optional board is installed select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter Adaptec Ultral60 SCSI Cards Win Server 2003 When N8103 56 board is installed Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards WinXP Server 2003 IA 32 When N8103 75 board is installed Adaptec I20 RAID Driver Disk for 32bit Windows 2000 XP 2003 When N8103 86 board is installed Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver Ver 1 02 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SCSI is installed Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver For Windows 2000 XP 2003 When Adaptec HostRAID SATA is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 1 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 80F board is installed MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear When the following message is shown press Enter to start Welcome to Setup When the installation of Windows Se
223. g steps to install a hard disk drive This procedure applies to all the hard disk drive bays See the next section for the procedure installing a hard disk drive in the flex bay NOTE Any hard disk drive can be installed or removed in or from the server only by removing the front bezel IMPORTANT m Inthe disk array configuration use the hard disk drives having the same specification including the capacity Do not press the POWER switch during the installation or removal of the hard disk drive if your server is running See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the front bezel 3 Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive The server has three slots Install hard disk drives in ascending order of the SCSI ID numbers starting from the leftmost slot The SCSI IDs assigned to the slots are all determined 4 Remove the dummy block or tray if installed IMPORTANT Keep the dummy block for future use 5 Unlock the hard disk drive handle Upgrading Your Server 9 7 6 Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive with the tray provided and handle and insert it into the slot IMPORTANT m Push the hard disk drive until it docks with the SCSI backplane connector m Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands Do not press the POWER switch during the i
224. gure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when maintenance partition exists First Partition Second Third Fourth lt Maintenance Partition gt Partition Partition Partition Retained Deleted Retained Retained You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration If Create New Partition at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected do not specify the value for the partition more than the actual area size If you specify other than 4095MB for the Installing Partition it is necessary to convert to NTFS If Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows 2000 does not exist excluding maintenance partition Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk drive to install Windows 2000 You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect 5 38 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 12 13 14 15 NOTES m Ifyou click Cancel in Basic Information screen the screen will go back to select the OS Cancel exists only in Basic Information screen m Ifyou click OK in Role of Computer screen the setup automatically selects default value for the later specification to continue the installation Copy the modu
225. h the following two procedures m Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server a o A Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts 5 Select Create Support Disk from Tools Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 5 Select Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Create Support Disk menu Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Master Control Menu Master Control Menu runs on the following operating systems Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64 Edition Windows XP Windows 2000 Windo
226. h Express Setup Exceptional Setup This section explains how to set up the server by the exceptional way You usually do not have to do as follows If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed in Chapter 5 set the server as follows The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by Express Setup If you want to install the Operating system when the server has new mass storage device not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER follow the steps below 1 Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server 2 Ifthe mass storage device is disk array controller configure the RAID system before running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 3 Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM a When the message Do you want to use the parameters file appears select Yes b When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears check Use Existing Array c Check Apply OEM FD for Mass storage device 5 Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the Express Setup Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive Continue the Express Setup referring to messages displayed on the display Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 29 Microsoft Windows 2000 This subsection provides information on i
227. h is a member of the Administrators group 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen 3 Click on Setup with left mouse button and click on Update NEC Express5800 system section 4 Continue your work for system update as the following message 5 Click on Restart Computer to restart the system 6 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive immediately after clicking on Restart Computer IMPORTANT If you change the configuration of the system by adding or removing hardware or Operating system software components or repair the system you must run the system update again Installing Windows Server 2003 E 15 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section please refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches
228. h your 40 0 optional device for details Packetized Yes Optimizes bus utilization and minimizes No command overhead to bolster performance by transferring commands data and status using Deal Transition DT data phases QAS Yes Quick Arbitration and Selection QAS No reduces the overhead of control release on the SCSI bus from one device to another to help decrease command overhead and increase bus utilization Initiate Wide Yes Select Yes if your SCSI device supports the Negotiation No Wide SCSI interface Select No if not Enable Disconnection Yes Select Yes No Send Start Unit Yes Select Yes to send the command to the Command No hard disk drive Otherwise select No BIOS Multiple LUN Yes Select No Support No Include in BIOS Scan Yes Select Yes No Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 25 Advanced Configuration Move the cursor onto Advanced Configuration and press Enter to display the submenu The following table lists submenu items available parameter and descriptions Submenu item Parameter Description Reset SCSI Bus at Enabled Select Enabled IC Initialization Disabled Display lt Ctrl gt lt A gt Enabled Select Enabled Message During Disabled BIOS Initialization Extended Int 13 Enabled Select Enabled Translation for DOS Disabled Drives gt 1 GByte POST Display Mode Verbose Select Ver
229. he Operating System with Express Setup 5 15 NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Optional Network Board Driver If you want to utilize optional Network Board N8104 86 88 111 103 109 112 113 115 install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM In case of utilizing N8104 86 88 111 lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT DOTNET BCS5 PRO100 WS03XP32 In case of utilizing N8104 103 109 112 113 115 lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT DOTNET BCS5 PRO1000 WS03XP32 If the procedure of installation is not clear refer to the installation procedure described in the section Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver 1 2 Start Device Manager Click Network adapters and Double Click Network Adapter Name Network Adapter Name Properties appears NOTE Intel R PRO 1000 is the name of On Board adapter All other names show the Optional Network Board Click Driver tab and click Update Driver Hardware Update Wizard appears Select the Install from a list or specific location Advanced radio button and click
230. he serial port to which an Port Serial Port A ACPI console is connected Serial Port B Baud Rate 9600 Specify the baud rate used for the 19 2K interface with successive remote 38 4K consoles 57 6K 115 2K Flow Control None Specify the flow control method Xon Xoff CTS RTS CTS RTS CD Console Type PC ANSI Specify the type of remote console VT100 VT UTF8 Event Log Configuration Submenu Factory set Option Parameter Description Your Setting Clear all Event Logs Press Enter and select Yes to clear the system event log Factory set 4 17 4 18 Configuring Your Server Boot If you move the cursor to the position of Boot the Boot menu appears which is used to set the boot priority The factory default boot order is listed below 1 CD ROM drive 2 Removable Devices 3 Hard Drive 4 IBA GE Slot 0200 v1216 5 IBA GE Slot 0219 v1216 The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting Finding the boot software the server starts the software The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the f and keys Move the cursor to the desired device with the f or key and change the priority with the or key IMPORTANT To boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER set the priority of the devices as shown in the figure above Exit The options on the menu are described below Exit Saving Changes Exit after writing all modifi
231. he subsequent messages that appear When the following message is shown press Enter to start Welcome to Setup When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished the system reboots automatically Windows Server 2003 has installed Go on the step 13 Windows Server 2003 R2 has installed Go on the step 10 When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed the Windows setup screen will be displayed after logged on to the system IMPORTANT m In this case the Windows setup screen may not be displayed Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the following procedures m You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after the application of System update Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 In this case note that the Windows setup screen is not displayed Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Confirm the parameters and click OK When the installation has completed remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM from the CD ROM drive and restart the system When the installation has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of manual Installing Windows Server 2003 E 9 Upgrade Installation IMPORTANT It is not the procedure of upgrade installation to Windows Server 2003 R2 from Windows Server 2003 Please r
232. his menu does not appear Go on the step 13 Next Basic Information wizard appears Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next After that click Next Back or Help on the screen to continue Modify the parameters each time if necessary IMPORTANT Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally required size If you select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration the information included in the first partition excluding maintenance partition will all be formatted and deleted The information included in the other partition will be retained In the figure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when maintenance partition exists First Partition Second Third Fourth lt Maintenance Partition gt Partition Partition Partition Retained Deleted Retained Retained You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration If you specify other than 4095MB for the Installing Partition it is necessary to convert to NTFS If Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does not exist excluding maintenance partition Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk drive to install Windows Server
233. ible Power Supply select Server AC LINK Power On The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again depending on the setting of AC LINK Setting of AC LINK System status before AC power off Stay Off Last State Power On Operating Off On On Aborting DC power being off also Off Off On Forced shutdown Off Off On Press the power switch continuously for four seconds or longer power This forcibly turns off the System Management Submenu Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting BIOS Version Displays the current BIOS version View only IPMI Specification Displays IPMI specification version Version View only BMC Device ID Displays BMC device ID View only BMC Device Displays BMC device version View Version only BMC Firmware Displays BMC firmware version View Version only PIA Version Displays version of the platform information area View only SDR Revision Displays revision of the sensor data record Console Redirection Submenu Factory set Option Parameter Description Your Setting BIOS Redirection Disabled Specify the address interrupt of the Port Serial Port A serial port to which a remote console Serial Port B is connected ACPI Redirection Disabled Specify t
234. ify Kernel Memory Dump instead Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 12MB In case the memory capacity is more than 2GB a free area of 2048 12MB or more In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive 5 24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 4 Specify Complete memory dump and modify Dump file in the Write debugging information group box e g Write the debug information in D drive write the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP 5 Click Settings on the Performance group box The Performance Options window appears Click Advanced tab on the Performance Options window Click Change on the Virtual memory group box Modify Initial Size in the Paging file size for selected drive box to the value larger than Recommended and click Set IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collec
235. ile name for the Setup File in File Name 7 Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on OK 6 18 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO referred to as ESMPRO hereafter lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations failures and performance With log data collected by ESMPRO a system administrator can track long term and short term performance monitor server usage create graphs to record trends and check server failure rates The administrator can use the information collected to create more efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage Functions and Features The ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation system extension and transfer tasks Some features of ESMPRO Manager include m Hardware and software server configuration Hardware resources mounted in servers such as the CPU memory disks disk arrays and LAN boards Software resources such as operating system information and drivers running on each server m Server failures On screen real time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type location cause and suggested corrective action Failure data includes hardware failure information such as sy
236. in rebuild process Configuring Your Server 4 33 When you select the array on Main Menu the detailed information of the hard disk drives in array is displayed Create Spare Delete Rebuild Verify Bootable striped RB MAXTOR j f ptimal Striped RB IBM C3SLA36UCDY16 8 16GB Optimal Detailed indications a ID Indicates SCSI ID of hard disk drive that configures the array m Type Indicates RAID level for the array O Striped RO Array configured in RAIDO O Mirrored R1 Array configured in RAID1 O Stripe Mirror R10 Array configured in RAID10 spanning of RAID1 m Vendor Indicates the manufacturer of hard disk drive m Product Indicates the model name of hard disk drive m Size Indicates the capacity of hard disk drive m Status Indicates the status of hard disk drive O Optimal Hard disk drive is normally operating O Degraded Hard disk drive is being degraded O Failed Hard disk drive is being failed O Building Hard disk drive is being built O Verify Hard disk drive is being verified O Replaced Hard disk drive is being rebuilt O Missing Hard disk drive is being hidden from controller Exiting the Utility To exit the utility press Esc until the following message prompts you to exit Select Yes to exit and press any key to restart the computer The change you have made becomes valid after the system restarts 4 34 Configuring Your Server RAID Configuration by S
237. indow is not displayed proceed to the next step IMPORTANT The partition or boot block of the hard disk drive selected Deleting information is deleted Select Yes for the message Are you sure and press Enter Selecting No returns to the main menu without deleting any array 4 42 Configuring Your Server Creating Spare Disk One spare disk can be assigned for one channel Spare disk is available for RAID1 only NOTE Spare disk must have larger capacity than the hard disk drives configuring the array If the hard disk drives in the array have 73GB or larger and the spare disk is 36GB a 36 GB disk cannot be used as a spare disk To assign a spare disk 1 Press S on Main Menu Some characters may not be displayed correctly when console redirection is used It is no problem on operation Ignore it and press S AIC 7982 B at slot 23 82 03 01 Create Spare Delete Rebuild Verify Bootable ID Type Vendor Product Size Status Hard Drive MAXTOR ATLASU3S2 _36_SCA 36GB Free Hard Drive IBM IC35L 36UCDY16 6 I6GB Free Hard Drive IBM IC35L 36UCDY16 8 36GB Free Hard Drive SEAGATE ST336753LC 36GB Free 2 Select Add Spare on the Option window as shown below Add Spare Delete Spare 3 Select a hard disk drive for spare disk from the list of available disks and press Enter Select Yes for the message Are you sure and press Enter Selecting No returns to the main menu without assigni
238. ing Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation and reinstall Windows Server 2003 R2 NOTE in place upgrade is to perform overwrite upgrade from Windows Server 2003 which already installed to Windows Server 2003 R2 Installing Windows Server 2003 E 5 INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition CD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Windows Server 2003 Service Pack CD ROM Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 you do not need to create it again You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures a ON Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server yo
239. ing remote enable that permits power to be activated from a variety of sources Peripheral Bays Your server supports a variety of standard PC AT compatible peripheral devices The chassis includes these peripheral bays m A3 5 inch front panel bay for mounting the standard 3 5 inch diskette drive supports 720 KB and 1 44 MB diskette media m A standard CD ROM drive bay m Three hot swap SCSI hard disk drive bays or two SATA hard disk drive bays for mounting hard disk drives installed in easily removable drive carriers NOTE The hot swap SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot swap back plane that require an 80 pin single connector attachment SCA connector on the drives that you install System Cooling The chassis includes a fan module with five fans for cooling the processor s hard drives and PCI cards The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air through the chassis The power supply contains two built in fans for cooling The SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model can include five optional redundant fans General Description 2 17 SAF TE LOGIC NOTE SAF TE Logic is in systems that include the hot swap SCSI disk drive cage SAF TE Logic is not available in systems that include the standard SCSI disk drive cage The SCSI backplane includes SAF TE SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure logic that provides an interface to the disk subsystem that supports status signals hot swapping
240. ing tools or components are provided to install the server on the rack fxs amp x10 M5 screw M5 core nut Required Tools You may only prepare a Phillips screwdriver to install the server on the rack 3 8 Setting Up Your Server Installation Procedure for NEC Rack Third Vendor s Rack This server can be installed in either the NEC rack or a third vendor s rack Take the following procedure to install the server in the rack Preparation before Installation The slide rail is fixed with the screw to prevent from falling off during transportation Remove the left and right core nuts from the front of the server before you install the server in the rack Set screw Core nut Hold the core nut and rotate the set screw to remove the core nut Keep the removed core nuts for future use Removing the Rail Assemblies Remove the sliding rails from the server Hold the rails and slowly slides them toward the rear of the server until a click is heard The click indicates that the rails are locked Push the release levers on the right and left sides of the server and remove the rail assemblies from the server while unlocking Setting Up Your Server 3 9 Only the inner rails remain screwed to the server when the rail assemblies have been removed Inner rails IMPORTANT The removed rail assemblies are to be installed on the inner rails later To install each rail a
241. intenance is reserved in the head of Hard Disk Drive a partition of approximately 55MB This area is for saving some maintenance utilities Do not delete the maintenance partition Creating Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 1000MB Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 33
242. ion m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 833721 Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot ini files If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing adding PAE switch in Boot ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory However the Microsoft operating system products which support PAE switch option are limited Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 291988 A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch Below is the example on how to add PAE switch to Boot ini file 1 Click Start point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 In Control Panel double click System 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Settings under Setup and Recovery 4 Under System Setup click Edit to open Boot ini 5 Add PAE to Operating Systems section in Boot ini file and then save it lt Example of Boot ini file gt boot loader timeout 30 default multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS operating systems multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS Windows Server 2003 fastdetect multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 2 WINDOWS Windows Server 2003 PAE fastdetect PAE C CMDCONS BOOTSECT DAT Microsoft Windows Recovery Console cmdcons This is the end of editing Boot ini file N
243. iple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk D 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 X64 EDITIONS Preparations for Installation m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition CD ROM m User s Guide m Getting Started m Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition you do not need to create it again You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER wit
244. is to copy data stored in a media into another media e g floppy disk digital audio tape or magnet optical disk IMPORTANT Make sure to make a back up copy of every floppy disk if provided The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media Dust or thermal changes as well as operator s misconduct or server failures may cause loss of data To avoid loss of data NEC recommends that you should make a back up copy of your valuable data on a regular basis B 4 Other Precautions CD ROM Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD ROM for the server Press the center of the storage case to remove the CD ROM from the case Do not drop the CD ROM Do not place anything on the CD ROM or bend the CD ROM Do not attach any label onto the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the CD ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the CD ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Do not leave the CD ROM with foods and drinks or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD ROM wipe the CD ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD ROM Do not use record spray cleaner benzene or thinner K
245. isplayed on the display Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 51 HostRAID The following explains the overview of HostRAID and the setup procedure Overview of HostRAID HostRAID provides RAID feature through the onboard serial ATA or SCSI interface in your system HostRAID consists of the driver that controls disk arrays and Adaptec Storage Manager hereinafter abbreviated to ASM for Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition or that Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition hereinafter abbreviated to ASMBE for Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 ASM and ASMBE are disk array management utilities The software products are mandatory for HostRAID to function normally Be sure to install both software products driver and utility For the driver refer to the setup procedure explained in this manual For ASMBE refer to the Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition User s Guide For ASM refer to the Adaptec Storage Manager User s Guide Overview of the specifications Hard disk drive SCSI HostRAID Four hard disk drives for each channel 2 spare drives SATA HostRAID One hard disk drive for each channel two hard disk drives max RAID level SCSI HostRAID RAIDO or RAID1 SATA HostRAID RAIDO or RAID1 Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Editions Enterprise x64 Editions Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Advan
246. ith the server or the manual provided with the board While a disk expansion unit is set in a disk array configuration you can use the Auto Rebuild feature of the disk array controller to restore data if one of the hard disk drives installed in the disk expansion unit fails Replace the failing hard disk drive while the power is on Hot swapping Upgrading Your Server 9 45 Redundant Hot Swap fan SCSI Hard Disk Drive Model Only Your server can include four optional redundant hot swap fans Installation 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Pull out the server from the rack 3 Open the drive cover 4 Locate the installation slot 4 2 3 1 Aitinn 200000 o ooooo0o0 q i 5 7 6 8 9 46 Upgrading Your Server 5 Disconnect all five fan cables from the mother board and remove all the fans from the chassis Upgrading Your Server 9 47 7 Change the jumper J11 setting as shown in figure below O SRE eee EEE n o foz o E Cc Co m o CGE yey ayy Mother board
247. ive The server is provided with the CD ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD ROM read only compact disk The CD ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See D pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD ROM drive Set a CD ROM on the CD ROM drive in the following procedure 1 Confirm that the power of the server is on with the POWER LED being lit in green before setting the CD ROM on the CD ROM drive 2 Press the Eject button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray comes out a little 3 Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops 4 Put the CD ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the character printed surface facing upward 2 40 General Description 5 As shown in the figure below hold the tray with a hand and press the CD ROM with fingers of another hand to make the hole of the CD ROM fit to the rotor at the center of the tray Rotor Press this part of CD ROM 6 Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive IMPORTANT If a noisy sound in driving the CD ROM drive occurs after setting a CD ROM set it again correctly To take out the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive press th
248. k drives of the same capacity and performance e g revolution for each pack to configure them in the array NOTES m Before installing a disk array controller board start the SETUP utility select Advanced PCI Configuration and confirm that Enabled is set for the parameter PCI Slot xx ROM xx PCI slot number m A disk array configuration of RAID or RAIDS increases disk reliability However the actually available capacity becomes smaller than the total hard disk drive capacity in the disk array configuration When you use the onboard RAID controller refer to the following documentation m SCSI RAID controller Online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM m SATA RAID controller Chapter 4 in this manual Upgrading Your Server 9 39 Installation See PCI Board for the installation of a SCSI RAID controller Removal Remove a SCSI RAID controller board in reverse order of the installation steps Use of internal hard disk drives in a RAID configuration To use the internal hard disk drives in a RAID configuration in the server containing an optional SCSI RAID controller reconnect the SCSI cables on the mother board to the disk array controller The internal hard disk drive interface is connected to the SCSI connector on the mother board at shipment Hard disk drive SCSI connector SCSI IDO Hard disk drive FRONT SCSI ID1 REAR Hard di
249. l SCSI controllers one by one The start up message appears for the SCSI controller board in the PCI 6 slot first the PCI 5 4 3 onboard SCSI 2 and finally 1 The message displayed may vary depending on the optional SCSI controller board Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for details 4 28 Configuring Your Server RAID BIOS The RAID Redundant Array of Inexpensive Devices option available for your system is N8103 80F 81F 86F RAID controller boards which give your system the added security of fault tolerance If you want to change the RAID level or add additional hard disk drives to the array use the RAID configuration utility The RAID configuration utility is included with a RAID controller If you are adding the RAID controller to an existing system the RAID configuration utility allows you to configure your disk array before reinstalling your network operating system The RAID controllers support various versions of RAID technology referred to as RAID levels To use any RAID level you must configure the RAID controller using the RAID configuration utility prior to installing your Network Operating System For an explanation of this utility refer to the documentation that comes with the RAID controller It describes RAID technology and provides tips on making your array perform well in your specific application It also covers array hardware preparation configuration and initialization A
250. l frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the RMC Do not touch the RMC terminal pins by bare hand or place the RMC directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier FRONT RMC connector o m oe MEE TE REAR EH Ed Mother board NOTE The illustrations in this subsection might slightly differ from your remote management card 9 50 Upgrading Your Server Installation Follow these steps to replace the RMC with an optional Advanced Remote Management card ARMO 1 See section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Pull out the server from the rack 3 Open the logic cover 4 Assemble the management network card that attached to the ARMC and install the card to the riser card 5 Connect the internal cable provided with ARMC to ARMC and the management network card as shown in the figure below Sooo aoocgoo ooo0o000 i oooo8a Qa a
251. l illustrates a mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard Mandatory Action Example Symbol to draw attention Term indicating a degree of danger Hot surface Immediately after the server is powered off its internal components such as hard disk drives are very hot Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing removing any component Symbol indicating a prohibited Description of a danger action may not always be indicated SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS Attentions Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified Pepee Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam Prohibited Actions BO Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified Do not disassemble repair or modify the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Mandatory Action Unplug the power cord of the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused SA Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified Make sure to follow the instruction NOTE
252. les for the optional mass storage driver If you want to install the optional mass storage driver insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the installation NOTE You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is attached to the system Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive according to the message If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive Insert Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Agree Software License Agreement screen appears Read the contents carefully and click I agree or press F8 if you do agree If you do not agree click I disagree or press F3 IMPORTANT m If you do not agree to this agreement the setup terminates and Windows 2000 will not be installed m If NetWare Gateway and Client Service is specified to install the window to specify the details of NetWare Gateway and Client Service pops up on the first logon Specify the appropriate value If you selected Yes on Apply Service Pack at Basic Information follow the procedure below 1 Follow the message to take Windows 2000 CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive 2 Follow the message to insert Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or later into the CD ROM drive Windows 2000 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to the system Install a
253. ling and Using Utilities 6 23 Server Setup This section explains Power Console Plus setup in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted Operating Environment This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a server m Hardware Machine NEC Express5800 series connected with the AMI disk array controller A Memory Size large enough for OS operation 8MB or more Free space of the hard disk drive 5MB or more Display unit Screen size 1024 x 768 or larger Required peripheral equipment Network Interface card CD ROM unit Pointing device such as a mouse m Software Microsoft Windows NT version 4 0 Windows NT Version 4 0 Service Pack 5 or later Internet Explorer 4 01 Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 6 24 Installing and Using Utilities Management PC Setup This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network TCP IP Operating Environment This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a management PC m Hardware Machine NEC Express5800 series PC AT compatible machine which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least equivalent to it Memory Size large enough for OS operation 8MB or more Free space of the hard disk drive 5 MB or more Display unit Screen size
254. lling it See the figure below Front Rear o o c co ce o Left side rail assembly Right side rail assembly 1 Loosen a screw securing the rail assembly o e ir 5 oD Screws o o f y gt D ol 2 Align the front and rear frames of rail assembly to the location where the core nuts are installed Locate the rail assembly so that the frame of the rack is located between core nuts and frames of rail assembly NOTE Confirm that the portion of the frame to fix the rail assembly is located in front of the rack frame 3 Firmly secure the rail assembly one screw for the front of a rail two screws for the rear of a rail 3 12 Setting Up Your Server Installing the Server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do notlift the server only by a single person Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components 1 Pull out the sliding rails of the right and left rail assemblies until they are locked 2 At least two persons are required to install the server Securely hold the server and install it in the rack Firmly fit the inner rails on the sides of the server into the rail assemblies that are in
255. llowing check box on the Option box O Dump Symbol Table O Dump All Thread Contexts O Add To Existing Log File O Create Crash Dump File For more information on each function above refer to Online Help Click OK 5 48 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Monitor Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble To utilize Network Monitor you need to restart the system after the installation has completed so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur 1 Point to Settings from Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 3 Click Add Remove Windows Component The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears 4 Check the Management and Monitoring Tools check box of the component ON and click Next 5 Ifthe setup asks to install the disk insert Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and click OK 6 Click Complete in the Windows Component Wizard dialog box 7 Click Close in the Add Remove Application dialog box 8 Close the Control Panel dialog box To start Network Monitor point to Program Administrative Tools and click Network Monitor For information on how to operate Network Monitor refer to Online Help Installing Maintenance Utilities Various maintenance utilities
256. llows you to locate the server you re working on from the rear of the servers on a rack Disk Access LED The disk access LED of the floppy disk drive or CD ROM drive is on while the drive is accessed General Description 2 13 Hard Disk Drive LED SCSI hot plug HDD model only The disk LED mounted in the 3 5 inch disk bay indicates the following depending on the status LED m Flashing green The LED indicates that the hard disk drive is accessed m On amber The LED indicates a failure of a hard disk drive mounted in disk array configuration NOTE Even if one of the hard disk drives fails in disk array configuration RAID1 or RAIDS the server can continue operation However replace the disk as soon as possible and perform reconstruction rebuild processing The failing disk can be replaced in hot swap mode m Flashing switching back and forth between green and amber The LED indicates that reconstruction rebuild processing is being performed for the hard disk drive This flashing does not indicate a failure When a failing hard disk drive is replaced in disk array configuration the system automatically rebuilds the data Auto rebuild function The LED switches back and forth between green and amber during rebuild processing The LED goes off when the rebuild processing has terminated It turns amber when the rebuild processing fails 2 14 General Description IMPORTANT If the se
257. lly starts immediately after you turn on the server power switch For details see the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM provided with the server The utility varies depending on the disk array controller board For details on the data transfer rate RAID and array configuration see the manual provided with the disk array controller board as well as the online document 9 44 Upgrading Your Server Use of a disk expansion unit in a disk array configuration A disk expansion unit is an exclusive device that can install up to 14 hard disk drives The number of hard disk drives depends on the model The server containing a disk array controller board can connect one or two of these devices For details on the number of devices connected see the manuals provided with the disk array controller and disk expansion unit IMPORTANT A disk expansion unit is provided with no hard disk drives You need to purchase hard disk drives separately An optional cable may be required to connect with a disk expansion unit Refer to the manual coming with the disk expansion unit for details After connecting the disk expansion unit use the RAID configuration utility in the chip on the board to set the disk expansion unit in a disk array configuration RAIDO RAID1 or RAIDS The utility varies depending on the board For details on settings and the setting methods see the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM provided w
258. ls of NetWare Gateway and Client Service pops up on the first logon Specify the appropriate value 15 Ifyou selected Yes on Apply Service Pack at Basic Information follow the procedure below 1 Follow the message to take Windows Server 2003 CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive 2 Follow the message to insert Windows Server 2003 Service Pack or later into the CD ROM drive Windows Server 2003 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to the system Install and configure the device drivers 16 If you install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition DISC 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISC 2 into the CD ROM drive after the OS installation Hereinafter proceed operations according to the message When the installation has finished remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition DISC 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISC 2 from the CD ROM drive and restart the system Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 13 Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop
259. lue specified for HUB Wake on LAN does not start from standby state Q Is Hub set to Auto Negotiation Or Is the client set to Auto Negotiation optimum speed For both hub and client Wake on LAN does not start from the standby state if the speed is fixed to 1000Mbps Troubleshooting 8 17 Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Source DCOM Category Error Event ID 10016 Description The application specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation permission for the COM server application with CLSID 555F3418 D99E 4E51 800A 6E89CFD8B1D7 to the user NT AUTHORITY LOCAL SERVICE SID S 1 5 19 This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative tool It is not a problem in operating the system There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Event Source Service Control Manager Event Type Error Event ID 7011 Description Timeout 30000 milliseconds waiting for a transaction response from the IMAP4Sve service When this event is not registered by rebooting the system it is not a problem in operating the system 8 18 Troubleshooting Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2 There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you operate Windows Serve
260. lus are registered trademarks or trademarks of LSI Logic Corp Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc of the United States AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec Inc of United States SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec Inc of the United States Adobe Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States All other product brand or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners Windows XP stands for Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system Windows 2000 stands for Microsoftg Windows 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system Windows 2003 stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Enterprise Edition Windows Me stands for Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition operating system Windows 98 stands for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Windows 95 stands for Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Momentary voltage drop prevention This product may be af
261. matically proceed a few seconds later Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM Utility To launch the SCSI device utility press Ctrl and A See Chapter 4 for setup and parameters You need to use the SCSI device utility in the following cases When new SCSI device is installed in a 5 25 inch device bay When an external SCSI device connection is changed When the internal SCSI device connection is changed When the internal hard disk drives are configured with HostRAID The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the SCSI device utility If more than one SCSI controller board is installed on the PCI bus of the server the system detects the boot devices in order of the PCI slots 1C and 1B 2 34 General Description POST displays SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen After a few seconds POST displays the following message prompting you to launch the BIOS setup utility SETUP stored in the system memory of the server This message appears at bottom left on the screen Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Launch the BIOS setup utility when you need to change the settings to meet the requirements for the server As long as the above message is not displayed with an error message you don t have to launch the utility Ignore the message POST will automatically proceed To launch the SETUP utility press F2 while the above message is displayed See Chapter 4 fo
262. mediate attention See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for troubleshooting information During memory test the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test Depending on the amount of installed memory it may take several minutes to complete the memory test NOTE The factory set is defined to hide the POST screen with the NEC logo screen You can always change the NEC logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc To change the start up screen use the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 for details During the POST you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on system board or on an installed option board Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup For the BIOS SETUP for the server see Chapter 4 For the BIOS SETUP for the option board refer to the manual that comes with the option board 3 22 Setting Up Your Server INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or Microsoft Windows 2000 operating systems To install the other operating system listed above contact your service representative IMPORTANT Before installing the operating system adjust the system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility SETUP See the next chapter for detail INSTALLING UTILITIES Install the utilities that come with the server See Chapter 6 for de
263. meters files that include the configuration information for the server setup If you want to set up the server as before execute the Express Setup with the parameters file you have saved before NOTES m The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system m If you want to create a parameters file have a blank floppy disk MS DOS 1 44MB format ready m Ifyou want to use the drivers located on the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device that ships with optional boards a parameters file is mandatory m You can create a parameters file in advance using Configuration Diskette Creator included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 3 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 in the Server Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation NOTES m Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions If you want to install it see Appendix D m If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup see Appendix E Installation Notice This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install Windows Server 2003 correctly Supported OS on this model The server supports the following edition m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003
264. mory test is done in the unit of Disabled 1KB Every location tests every memory location Disabled indicates that only memory initialization is done Online Spare Disabled Disables or enables online spare memory Memory Enabled feature See DIMM in Chapter 8 for details Factory set 4 10 Configuring Your Server PCI Configuration Embedded SCSI submenu Option Parameter Description Your Setting SCSI Controller Enabled Enables or disables the onboard SCSI Disabled controllers Option ROM Scan Enabled If Enabled initialize device expansion ROM Disabled Factory set Embedded NIC Dual Gbit submenu SCSI model only Option Parameter Description Your Setting LAN Controller Disabled If Disabled the BIOS will hold the Enabled embedded chip in reset In this configuration the controller hardware is completely disabled and will be invisible to the PnP operating systems Option ROM Scan Enabled If Enabled initialize device expansion ROM Disabled Factory set Embedded Video Controller submenu Option Parameter Description Your Setting Onboard VGA Disabled If Disabled the BIOS will hold the Control Enabled embedded chip in reset In this configuration the controller hardware is completely disabled and will be invisible to the PnP operating systems Factory set O
265. must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally If you want to utilize AFT ALB feature follow the procedure below to setup Str oe N Open the Network Adapter property from the Device Manager Select the Teaming tab check Team with other adapters and click New Team Enter a name of the team and click Next Check adapters to be included in the team and click Next In Select a team mode select Adapter Fault Tolerance or Adaptive Load Balancing and click Next Click Finish From the Device Manager open the device property of the team name set above select the Settings tab and click Modify Team To set an adapter in the team as the primary adapter select a driver and click Set Primary To set an adapter in the team as the secondary adapter select a driver and click Set Secondary After terminating both settings click OK and close the screen Re install the Network Driver The network driver will be installed automatically Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions D 15 Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver For the graphics accelerator driv
266. n and Installing Utilities i 7 l Operating System Installation Menu appears EE B Creating a working partition Confirm Setup File Create New File No Floppy Disk Choose the Windows category In case Skip is selected Confirm or input parameters for the Windows installation Remove the Floppy Disk and CD ROM from the Drive 44 Insert Windows CD ROM tti Agree Software License Agreement Copying NEC Modules 4 Copying Selected Application Modules y Insert SP CD ROM If you selected Yes on Apply Service Pack RER Install OS Automatically Log on Automatically After restarting the computer the installation is completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 9 Installing the Windows Server 2003 Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the wizard You can also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk as a setup file NOTE Prepare a floppy disk to use as Configuration Disk if you want to save the parameters or use the drivers located on the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device that ships with optional boards When using the floppy disk the Express setup can continue the setup without specifying the parameters 1 Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server NOTES m If you operate installing Win
267. n off the server until the POST Power On Self Test completes See Chapter 2 for details of POST When you have just turned off the server wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back on Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server Clean the server on a regular basis See Chapter 7 for cleaning Regular cleaning proactively prevents various failures of the server Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop To prevent this problem it is recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable After carriage of device After storage of device After the device is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring device operation temperature 10 C 35 C humidity 20 80 Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month When the system clock is installed in a system requiring high time precision it is recommended to use a time server NTP server If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment contact your service representative to ask maintenance Store the unit under the storage condition temperature 10 C 55 C humidity 20 80 without condensation to allow built in devices and the unit to operate correctly in the next operation 1 12 Notes on Using Your
268. nd configure the device drivers Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 39 Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Be sure to install Utilizing PROSet enables the following issues m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Specify teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environment tolerant on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Program Accessory and click Explorer 3 Run PROSET EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K BC5 PROSET WIN2K The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish Di Ot a Restart the system 5 40 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Driver When PROSet is not installed 1
269. ng 3 5 inch floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk double sided high density track type Stores data of 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk double sided double density track type Store data of 720KB Make sure that the server is powered the POWER LED is lit before inserting a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive the drive clicks and the eject button on the floppy disk is slightly pushed out NOTES m When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted the message notifying that date read is not available and the message prompting formatting are displayed Refer to the manual that comes with the OS to format the floppy disk m Ifthe floppy disk contains a system powering on or restarting the server with the floppy disk inserted boots the system from the floppy disk To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive press the eject button NOTE Make sure that the floppy disk access LED is unlit before ejecting the floppy disk Ejecting the disk when the access LED is lit may destroy the disk data 2 38 General Description NOTE Use of the floppy disk The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Keep the following notes in mind to use it Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes Attach the label to the correct position Do not write anything directly onto the disk s
270. ng an object on the server may also cause personal injury if the server drops 1 8 Notes on Using Your Server A CAUTION gt gt Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power outlet before installing removing any optional internal device or connecting disconnecting any interface cable to from the server If the server is off powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source touching an internal device cable or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted from a short circuit Do not use any unauthorized interface cable Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and connector before connecting a cable Using an authorized cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit resulting in a fire Also observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable m Do not use any damaged cable connector m Do not step on the cable m Do not place any object on the cable m Do not use the server with loose cable connections Notes on Using Your Server 1 9 Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices A WARNING Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the server on any occasion other than described in this User s Guide Failure to follow
271. ng any spare disk Configuring Your Server 4 43 5 On the main menu make sure that the type of selected hard disk drive is changed to Spare and its status Optimal reate Spare To unassign a spare disk take the same steps from 1 to 4 except for selecting Delete Spare instead of Add Spare Boot Priority To specify boot priority to an array 1 Select an array you wish to set the boot priority from the main menu and press Enter 2 Press B on the window showing the details of array Some characters may not be displayed correctly when console redirection is used It is no problem on operation Ignore it and press B 4 44 Configuring Your Server RAID Configuration of Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive Your server includes the serial ATA RAID controller by supporting the RAID levels 0 and 1 You need two SATA serial ATA hard disk drives for configuration m RAIDO striping Stores data on two hard disk drives by dividing it striping Both hard disk drives can be accessed at the same time This improves disk access performance compared with using a single hard disk drive IMPORTANT m RAIDO does not have data redundancy When a hard disk drive failure occurs data cannot be restored m Logical capacity of the array becomes a multiple of the connected hard disk drive m RAID1 mirroring Stores the data being saved to one hard disk dive to another hard disk drive This method is called
272. ng file size install an additional new disk Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 7 Re installing to the hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix D to re install the system About Maintenance Partition the area displayed as MAINTE_P The maintenance partition for server maintenance is reserved in the head of Hard Disk Drive a partition of approximately 55MB This area is for saving some maintenance utilities Do not delete the maintenance partition 5 8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup The Flow of Setup This section shows the flow of the Express setup Process that proceeds automatically Process that needs to input or selec Do you want to use the parameters file in order to set up the Express server Yes No Read notes and restrictions Confirmed Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Confirmed Confirmed Now File Select Setup Parameter File Existing File Checking the Setup Parameter File Skipped tT Correct Select whether or not to confirm modify the setting Confirmed i A Disk Array Configuration Dialogue box appears v J Creating Maintenance Partitio
273. ng the internal hard disk drives to the N8103 80F disk array controller board installed on the riser card dedicated to low profile PCI boards Remove the fan duct Install the N8103 80F to the low profile side of the PCI riser card assembly Disconnect the SCSI cable from the mother board Connect the connector of the SCSI cable to the disk array controller 9 42 Upgrading Your Server m LED relay cable connection To indicate the status of access to the internal hard disk drives in a disk array configuration connect the LED relay cable connected on the mother board to the HDD LED connector of the disk array controller 1 Connect the LED relay cable connector black to the LED Active pin on the disk array controller Connect the pin having the red cable to the LED Active pin Do not connect any pin having the black cable 2 Confirm that the LED relay cable connector brown is connected to the HDD LED connector on the mother board Pin red il N8103 80F maramama O T 7 0000000 Oo000000 0000000 D 0000000 Oo m O 0000000 O e fl rau pTi fnn ME o Oe q Upg
274. ng the utilities to your server or management workstations Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 27 Updating the System Installing Service Pack IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 CD ROM which contains Service Pack 1 to your system you do not have to apply Service Pack again Update the system in the situation below m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority e g Administrator and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Setup in Master Control Menu screen appears so left click the item Click Update the System from the menu and the setup will start After that follow the message to continue the setup process Making Backup Copies of System Information The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive oe eS Select Save 5 28 Installing the Operating System wit
275. nit General Description 2 33 POST Execution Flow The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order IMPORTANT Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while POST is in progress m Some system configurations may display the message Press Any Key to prompt a key entry This message is driven by BIOS of an installed optional board Make sure to read the manual that comes with the optional board before any key entry m Powering on the server after you installed or removed an optional PCI board or moved it to another slot may display the message that indicates incorrect board configuration and suspend POST In such a case press F1 to continue POST Board configuration can be made using the utility described later 1 After a few seconds from power on POST starts checking the memory The count message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the display unit screen The memory check may takes a few minutes to complete depending on the memory size of the server Also it may take approximately one minute for the screen display to appear after rebooting the server 2 Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check These messages appear to indicate that the system has detected the CPU keyboard and mouse 3 POST then detects the internal SCSI controller and display the message prompting you to launch the SCSI device utility Ignore the message POST will auto
276. not use it except maintenance m Off line Maintenance Utility Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program that performs preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server See Chapter 8 or online help for details System Diagnostics Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if the connection between the server and additional board is normal After the System Diagnostics is executed a system check program assigned to each model starts See Chapter 7 for details Create Support Disk NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM If your system has the Windows operating system you may find it more convenient to use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows based to make support disks Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label which is useful for management in the future Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk Installing and Using Utilities 6 7 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edi
277. ns menu 8 Select Configure View HostRAID and press Enter Options Configure View SCSI Controller Settings SCSI Disk Utilities 4 32 Configuring Your Server Main Menu When you select Configure View HostRAID Settings the Main Menu as shown below appears upon completion of device scan Hard Drive SEAGATE ST336753LC Main Menu Display ID Indicates SCSI ID of hard disk drive or ID of array Type Indicates RAID level for the array and available disk drive that is not in the array O Hard Drive Available hard disk drive that is not in the array O Striped RO Array configured in RAIDO O Mirrored R1 Array configured in RAID1 O Stripe Mirror R10 Array configured in RAID10 spanning of RAID1 O Spare Hard disk drive assigned as a spare disk Vendor Indicates the manufacturer of hard disk drive or HostRAID Adaptec Product Indicates the model name of hard disk drive or array name Size Indicates the capacity of hard disk drive or that of array Status Indicates the status of hard disk drive or array O Free Available hard disk drive that is not in the array O Optimal Array is in normal state O Degraded One of the RAID1 or RAID10 hard disk drives is failed O Dead One or more RAIDO hard disk drives is failed Two or more RAID1 or RAID10 hard disk drives are failed O Building The array is in build process O Verify The array is in verify process O Rebuild The array is
278. nstallation or removal of the hard disk drive if your server is running 7 Slowly close the handle The handle is locked when a click is heard IMPORTANT Be careful not to get your finger caught between the handle and tray m Push the drive further to check if it is firmly secured NOTE Confirm that the handle is hooked to the frame when having inserted the hard disk drive 8 Install the front bezel you removed in step 2 There are tabs on the left side of the front bezel Engage the tabs with the server frame install the front bezel and lock it with the security key 9 8 Upgrading Your Server Installation SATA fixed HDD model Install a hard disk in the following procedure A hard disk drive may be installed in any other slot in the similar procedure NOTE Hard disk drives can be installed or removed in or from the server only by opening the front bezel IMPORTANT In the disk array configuration hard disk drives configuring a specific pack should have the same specification including the capacity See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Unlock of the front bezel with the security key and remove the front bezel Check the slot in which the hard disk drive is installed aoe A T Loosen two screws securing the drive carrier Upgrading Your Server 9 9 5 Remove the drive
279. nstalling Microsoft Windows 2000 in the server Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation NOTE If you install Windows 2000 without using Express Setup see Appendix E Installation Notice This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install Windows 2000 correctly Supported OS on this model The server supports the following edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server hereinafter referred to as Windows 2000 On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative BIOS Settings Before installing Windows 2000 confirm if the BIOS settings are correct On the BIOS settings there are some items to specify for the new functions provided by Windows 2000 Plug and Play support for USB interface and so on See Chapter 4 to confirm the settings NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Agent requires to install the necras sys driver on your Windows system If you install the Windows without using the Express Setup run the Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu 5 30 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass sto
280. o be managed by NEC DianaScope This section explains specific notes on managing this product remotely from NEC DianaScope m This product can be managed remotely from NEC DianaScope only when it is equipped with a remote management card or advanced remote management card m This product does not support the remote FD function 6 26 Installing and Using Utilities This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server MAKING BACKUP COPIES NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disk drives of the server on a regular basis For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools consult with your service representative When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration select System Information Management and then Save of the Off line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array configuration When your hard disk drives have been auto rebuilt due to a failure it is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data To make a backup copy of the configuration data use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the optional disk array controller board Refer to the manual supplied with the
281. o ensure normal operation of the server however make sure to follow the following restrictions m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following the server power on m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start up message of the SCSI Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot IMPORTANT Take a note on the on screen message before contacting your service representative The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance Troubleshooting 8 5 POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen The following table lists error messages and actions to take IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service representative useful information for maintenance Alarm messages are Error Error message Recommended Action code 0200 Failure Fixed Disk Contact your service representative 0210 Stuck Key Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again 0213 Keyboard locked Unlock key switch Release the lock of the key switch If the error cannot be corrected in spite of the release of the lock contact your service representative 0220 Monitor type does not match CMOS Run Start the SETUP If the error cannot be SETUP corrected in spite of the start of SETUP contact
282. on manvals for this system as well as options prior to maintenance Disconnect all AC power cords from both system and external peripherals prior to installing removing options HTT AMERA AERALA EEH ARTI ERR RIRES CIEL TICA REL A mee NZ Ame Do not drop any screws inside the system FE AEE ETRE MEP AT WEEE PEARL SALUAR AEALAES MARA WAH R KRUTT 3YREOSRORG WFI F AA4 REBRU ELSBRUTRAU A Road REPAKO WORT Refer to the User s Guide when option board or peripherals are installed Incorrect installations may resuit in damage to the system and lead to accidents THRE AAR SETEEM HSOSM AARE EMT MRTE WHSSRRERARNAE PESAATED RHEO LIUADICERULT PAU A A To avoid the risk of personal injury be careful when accessing the inside of the system WADARS ERATE REORSLT BHORG RAORHe LIMOS CHSLFTRAL Firmly hold the bottom of the system when required to lift and carry the system PENEIRAR FER R SR 243 201192 001 A 1 f AY 80 Notes on Using Your Server 1 3 SAFETY NOTES This section provides notes on using the server safely Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the server For symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier General A WARNING S Ay As 9 S Always install the server on a rack conforming to the relevant standard Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly
283. onal devices available for the server procedures for install or removing such optional devices and notes on using them IMPORTANT m Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user However NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user NEC recommends you ask your service representative for install or removing any optional devices m Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorized by NEC Repair of the server due to malfunctions failures or damage resulted from installing such devices or cables will be charged m When you made any change to the hardware configuration make sure to update the system see Chapter 5 for details 9 2 Upgrading Your Server SAFETY NOTES Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details OP Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before working with the server a2 A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire
284. or HUB Also specify the other network driver with the same progress above Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 41 Optional Network Board Driver If you want to utilize optional Network Board N8104 86 88 111 103 109 112 113 115 install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Refer to the re installation procedure described in Appendix F Network Driver for N8104 86 88 111 lt CD ROM DriveLetter gt WINNT W2K BCS5 PRO100 WIN2K Network Driver for N8104 103 109 112 113 115 lt CD ROM DriveLetter gt WINNT W2K BCS5 PRO1000 WIN2K Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT Adaptive Load Balancing ALB Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally If you want to utilize AFT ALB feature follow the procedure below to setup 1 Double
285. or Int13 Extensions to Enabled 5 Exit from BIOS setup menu and restart the system 6 Start the Express Setup Setup is interrupted at Creating a working partition process during the Express Setup Q Did you connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed Disconnect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed and perform the Express Setup Problems with Master Control Menu The master control menu fails to appear Q Is your system Windows NT 4 0 or later or Windows 95 or later The CD ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 95 The older versions do not automatically start from the CD ROM L Is Shift pressed Setting the CD ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature Q Is the system in the proper state The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD ROM In such a case start the Explorer and run MC IST EXE in the CD ROM 8 26 Troubleshooting Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly during setting of setup information When the Trekking command is used Ifthe specified number of colors is fewer than 256 in the display setting the bit map is not displayed correctly but the setup information can be displayed correctly The Point to Point tunneling protocol cannot be set The protocol i
286. ot Exit gt System Management gt Console Redirectio Assert NMI on PERR Assert NMI on SERR Post Error Pause AC LINK Setup item menu F1 Help ty Esc Exit Explanation of key functions menu Item Specific Help Selects system power Enabled state after AC power Online help Enabled loss window Enabled CLast State n Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit Parameter high lights upon selection menu The menus displayed in gray indicates the information only or unchangeable secured by BIOS password Cursor f Cursor lt gt and Enter Esc F9 F10 Selects an item on the screen The highlighted item is currently selected Selects the Main Advanced Security Server Boot or Exit menu Changes the value parameter of the selected item When a submenu option an option preceded by is selected these keys are disabled Press Enter to select determine parameters Exit SETUP and return to the previous screen Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the factory set parameter Save and exit the SETUP utility 4 4 Configuring Your Server Menu and Parameter Descriptions The SETUP utility has the following six major menus m Main m Advanced m Security m Server m Boot m Exit To set minute functions select a submenu from the above menus The following desc
287. ou keep those controllers connecting during installation process pop up messages may appear This does not affect on system behavior Click YES and continue the installation Follow the message hereafter Installing Windows Server 2003 E 3 MO Device If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation the file system will not be converted normally Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 2900MB Only Windows Server 2003 3500MB Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack1 4400MB Windows Server 2003 Service Pack1 CD ROM Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system The maximum paging file size which c
288. owing driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen 5 18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 75 install it according to the following procedure lt In the case of use of Windows Server 2003 SevicePack1 or Windows Server 2003 R2 gt If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 75 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically lt In the case of Windows Server 2003 which has not installed SevicePack1 gt 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel gt Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as Other device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK 8 Specify the following driver and click Next Adaptec SCSI Card
289. partition 1 WINNT Windows 2000 Server fastdetect multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINNT Windows 2000 Server PAE fastdetect PAE This is the end of editing Boot ini file NOTE If you choose one of the items in the Default operating system drop down list box in Setup and Recovery group box you can make your system start automatically from the switch you specified Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 45 Setting for Solving Problems Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur Memory Dump Debug Information This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump debug information in the server IMPORTANT Cautions for the Memory Dump m The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory dump Customers need only to specify the memory dump m If any trouble occur after specifying the process below the message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory may appear but continue to start the system If you restart the system in such case memory dump may not be stored correctly Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Point to Settings in Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click System The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Click Advanced 4 Click Startup and
290. pgrading Your Server Drive Cover Open the drive cover when installing removing a fan assembly processor and backup file device or reconnecting an internal cable Removal See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Slide the drive cover toward the rear of the server while pressing the lock button on the cover 4 Lift off the drive cover from the server Installation When installing the drive cover confirm that the tab of the cover is securely inserted into the slot in the server frame Slide the drive cover toward the rear of the server The drive cover is locked when a distinct click is heard At this time check the release button for normal state Upgrading Your Server 9 21 Logic Cover Open the logic cover when installing removing a DIMM processor and PCI add in card or reconnecting an internal cable Removal 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Pull out the server from the rack 3 Loosen a captive thumbscrew at the rear of the server 4 Slide the logic cover toward the rear of the server and lift off the cover from the server Installation When installing the logic cover confirm that the tab of the cover is securely inserted into the slot in the server frame Slide the logic cover toward the rear of the server and secure
291. ponents Keep any component in an anti static bag until you actually install it to the server Hold any component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or parts To store or carry any component place it in an anti static bag 9 4 Upgrading Your Server PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components 1 Prepare the Phillips screwdriver 2 Shut down the OS 3 Unlock the front bezel S Unlocked Locked 4 Remove the front bezel 5 Press the POWER switch to power off the server the POWER LED goes off 6 Remove all cables and power cords from the server Upgrading Your Server 9 5 DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure Hard Disk Drive The server has three device bay slots to install hard disk drives with the SCA2 interface Ultra 160 SCSI in the disk bay of the front of the server IMPORTANT m Do not use any hard disk drives that are not authorized by NEC Installing a third party hard disk drive may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk drive Purchase hard disk drives of the following models lt SCSI hard disk drive gt 8150 163F 73 2 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 8150 171F 146 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 8150 192 300 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 8150 165F 36 3 GB 15
292. ption Parameter Description Your Setting PCI Slot 1B Disabled Used to enable or disable an option ROM Option ROM Enabled on a PCI board connected to the full height riser card PCI Slot 1C Disabled Used to enable or disable an option ROM Option ROM Enabled on a PCI board connected to the low profile riser card Option PCI X Disabled Cannot be used in this system Do not Riser Support Enabled change the factory setting PCle Option Mode Disabled Cannot be used in this system Do not Enabled change the factory setting Factory set Peripheral Configuration Configuring Your Server 4 11 IMPORTANT Note that the interrupt and or base I O address are not overlapped with others address is used in another resource the yellow asterisk appears Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly If the value set for the interrupt or base I O Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial PortA Disabled Selects whether serial port A is Enabled enabled or disabled Auto Base I O address 3F8 Selects the base I O address for serial 2F8 portA 3E8 2E8 Interrupt IRQ 3 Selects the interrupt for a serial port A IRQ 4 Serial Port B Disabled Selects whether serial port B is Enabled enabled or disabled display only Auto Base I O address 3F8 Selects the base I O address for serial 2F8 portA 3E8 2E8 Interrupt IRQ 3 Selects the inter
293. quired Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m For more information on Recommended value see Partition Size to be Created described earlier m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 9 Click OK The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 47 Windows 2000 Dr Watson Windows 2000 Dr Watson is a debugger for application errors If any application error is detected Dr Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information log Follow the procedure below and specify Dr Watson to collect diagnostic information 1 2 Click Run on Start menu Type drwtsn32 exe in the Open box and click OK The Dr Watson for Windows 2000 dialog box appears Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the Log File Path box The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name DRWTSN32 LOG NOTE You can not specify network pass Specify the pass on local computer Specify the location of crash dump file in the Crash Dump box NOTE Crash Dump File is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger Check the fo
294. r is operated through the 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T network interface If the LED is lit amber the network port is operated through 1000BASE T Ifthe LED is lit green the network port is operated through 100BASE TX If the LED is off the network port is operated through 10BASE T General Description 2 15 STANDARD FEATURES High performance m Intel Xeon processor m High speed network interface 1000Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps supported m High speed disk access Ultra320 SCSI or SATA m High speed memory access DDR2 400 High reliability m Memory monitoring feature error correction error detection CPU memory degradation feature logical isolation of a failed device Memory chip kill Bus parity error detection Temperature detection Error notification Internal fan monitoring feature Internal voltage monitoring feature Auto rebuild feature optional hot swappable BIOS password feature Mechanical security lock Onboard RAID controller Redundant fans option Redundant power supply Remote Management Card RMC Management Utilities m NEC ESMPRO m NEC DianaScope Maintenance Features m Off line Maintenance Utility m Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch 4 SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 2 SATA fixed hard disk drive model Expandability One 64 bit 133MHz PCI X and one 64 bit 66MHz PCI X Large memory of up to 16 GB Three hot swap SCSI hard disk drive bays Up to two multi processors
295. r 2003 R2 Source IPMIDRV Type Error EventID 1001 Description The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an IPMI BMC device The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI BMC by searching the SMBIOS for Type 38 record But either no record was found or the record was not compatible with the version of the device driver Ifa SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected the Dump Data field of the event contains a binary representation of the record If you use Hardware Management which is provided by Windows Server 2003 R2 above shown event log will be registered For more details refer to Enabling the Hardware Management Feature bundled in Windows Server 2003 R2 on the following site NEC Express5800 Web Site http www nec co jp express download W2K3_R2 Troubleshooting 8 19 Problems with Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 During Windows 2000 installation the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer Error detected on the device Device CdRom0 during the paging operation There is no problem on this issue Fail to start the OS LJ Isa floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server L Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and restart the server L Is the OS broken Use recovery process to recover the system See Recove
296. r has no hard disk drive containing an OS connected See Chapter 4 for details FRONT Riser card slot Dedicated to full height PCI boards Slot number 1B Riser card slot il Dedicated to low profile PCI boards i Slot number 1C Mother board PCI board slot B LULL LUULLAAN PCI board slot C Connect to riser card slot B X Connect to riser card slot C Riser card 9 34 Upgrading Your Server Notes Observe the following notes on installing removing a PCI board m Do not touch the terminals of the riser cards and the leads of electronic components with your bare hand Fingerprints and dust left on them cause the server to malfunction due to a connection failure or damage to the leads m A riser card is designed for installing only low profile PCI boards or full height PCI boards Before installing a PCI board make sure of the card specification m PCI slot number 1C is assigned to the riser card for low profile PCI boards and 1B is assigned to the riser card for full height PCI boards m The system detects the boot devices in order of the PCI bus slots 1C low profile PCI board and then 1B full height PCI board m The PCI devices of the same type including onboard PCI device may be recognized in diff
297. r setup and parameters The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the SETUP utility 6 If your server uses onboard serial ATA SATA RAID feature the following message is displayed on the screen to prompt you to run Array Configuration Utility ARC Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for Adaptec RAID Configuration Utility Press Ctrl A to run ARC For detail explanation see Chapter 4 7 Ifthe server has an optional RAID controller installed POST displays the message prompting you to launch the RAID configuration utility and the RAID BIOS setup utility Refer to the manual supplied with the RAID controller for detail instructions POST will automatically proceed a few seconds later 8 Ifyou set a password using the BIOS setup utility SETUP the password entry screen appears upon successful completion of POST Up to three password entries will be accepted Three incorrect password entries disable the server to boot In sucha case turn off the power and wait about ten seconds before turning on to boot the server IMPORTANT Do not set a password before installing an OS 9 The OS starts when POST completes General Description 2 35 POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen See Chapter 8 for POST error codes IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service representative Alarm messages are
298. rading Your Server 9 43 N8103 81F Pin Red 0000000 COOO00O O000000 O000000 O000000 O o il Jo II TTAITENT PII UV LUT PTV VV m Disk array configuration of internal hard disk drives Observe the following notes on configuring a disk array The server must contain more than one SCSI hard disk drive having the same capacity and the same rotational speed The minimum number of required disks depends on the configuration of RAID Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Independent Disks Select set a RAID level RAIDO RAIDI or RAIDS of disk array configuration When installing a system in an internal hard disk drive you should use Express Setup to perform all the procedures for RAID configuration OS installation and then OS setup Use Express Setup even when not installing a system Start Express Setup select OS Selection Others The installer automatically performs all the procedures for RAID configuration maintenance partition setting and then maintenance utility installation When making the setup in manual mode use the RAID configuration utility in the chip on the board You can start the utility during execution of POST that automatica
299. rage device except ones listed below see Exceptional setup and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 lt SCSI Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch N8103 86 Disk Array Controller Och Adaptec HostRAID SCSI Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller lt SATA Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SATA Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 31 Windows 2000 Express Setup can install Windows 2000 operating system Confirm below notes before installing the Windows IMPORTANT m Before starting the installation complete all the process of adding the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe BIOS and optional board specification m The document for installing Windows 2000 is also attached to the oth
300. rd to display the following screen Set Supervisor Password Enter New Password tO Confirm New Password L Enter the passwords on the dialog box Passwords may have up to eight characters including alphanumerics and symbols IMPORTANT m User password can be set only when Administrator password is already set m Set the passwords only after OS is installed See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting User Password Is Clear Status only user cannot modify Set Once set this can be disabled by setting it to a null string or by clearing password jumper on system board see Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this Chapter Supervisor Clear Status only user cannot modify Password Is Set Once set this can be disabled by setting it to a null string or by clearing password jumper on system board see Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this Chapter Set User Up to eight Supervisor password controls access Password alphanumerics to the setup utility When Enter is pressed the user is prompted for a password press Esc to abort Once set this can be disabled by setting it to a null string or by clearing password jumper on system board refer to Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in this chapter 4 14 Configuring Your Server press ESC key to abort Once set this can be disabled by setting it to a null string or by clearing passwor
301. rectly remove it and then install it again Be careful not to apply excess force to a PCI board or riser card Doing so may damage the card NOTE Confirm that the end of the PCI board bracket is inserted in the frame slot of the riser card 7 Secure the PCI board with the screw you removed in step 5 IMPORTANT This step is to protect the terminals of the riser card from dust or fingerprints Dust and fingerprints left on them cause the server to malfunction Low Profile side Full height side Upgrading Your Server 9 37 8 Insert the riser card assembly into the slot on the mother board Align the riser card terminal section with the slot on the mother board and firmly push the riser card until it is fully seated NOTE m There are catches on the riser card frame that are used to secure the riser card to the cabinet When inserting the riser card confirm that the catches are correctly fit into the holes on the rear of the cabinet After the insertion push the riser card with your fingers until you cannot see any part of the riser card terminal section The riser card is now fully seated in the slot m Pay attention not to damage the components on mother board with the riser card when inserting it into the slot Install the components you removed previously 10 Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message an
302. reen If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen execute forced power off forced shut down continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds The power will not be turned off if you press the switch just one time Troubleshooting 8 21 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM check the following Q Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server an error message will appear or the OS will boot Q Is BIOS configuration correct The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Use the BIOS SETUP utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD ROM drive first lt Menu to check Boot gt Q Is an error message appeared When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress the following message appears After this message appears check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in the table below Message Cause and Remedy This machine is not supported This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this server Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server NvRAM access error An access to the nonvolatile memory NvRAM is not acceptable Hard disk access error The hard disk drive is not connected or it is failed Check whe
303. ribes available functions and parameters as well as the factory set for each menu Configuring Your Server 4 5 Main Option Parameter Description Your Setting System Time HH MM SS Set the system time System Date MM DD IYYYY Set the system date Legacy Floppy A Disabled 360Kb 51 1 2MB 5 720Kb 3 1 44 1 25MB 37 2 88MB 3 Set the settings of floppy disk drive A standard configuration Legacy Floppy B Disabled 360Kb 51 1 2MB 5 720Kb 31 1 44 1 25MB 3 2 88MB 3 Set the settings of floppy disk drive B No second floppy disk drive is included in this system Hard Disk Pre Delay Disabled 3 seconds 6 seconds 9 seconds 12 seconds 15 seconds 21 seconds 30 seconds Allows slower spin up drives to come ready Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Slave Serial ATA Channel 0 Master Serial ATA Channel 1 Master Select submenu Set the information on the device connected to each channel on the submenu The settings of some items may be changed However leave the items as they are at the shipment Processor Settings Select submenu Shows the processor settings submenu Language English US Italiano Espa ol Fran ais Deutsch Select which language BIOS displays Factory set 4 6 Configuring Your Server Primary IDE Master Primary
304. ring the system startup Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for Adaptec RAID Configuration Utility NOTE If it takes a long time until a message appears on the display unit press Ctrl A three to five seconds after power on After a while the ACU menu appears Array Configuration Utility Disk Utility To change or delete RAID configuration To perform low level formatting or verification of RAID drive Configuring Your Server 4 47 Configuring RAID Take the following steps to configure RAID IMPORTANT m Once the array is created and its properties are assigned you cannot change the array properties m Be sure to set Bootable according to Managing Arrays using the BIOS SETUP utility Otherwise the memory dump cannot be collected at system failure or other problem will be raised 1 Start the ACU See Running the Array Configuration Utility ACU described earlier 2 Use the cursor key to select Array Configuration Utility from the Options menu and press Enter Options Array Configuration Utility Disk Utility 3 From the main menu select Create Array and press Enter anage Arrays reate Array dd Deleate Hostspare nitialize Drives 4 48 Configuring Your Server 4 Select two hard disk drives for RAID and press Insert When you press Insert the selected drive is added to the Selected Drives list box at right If you wish to delete any drive select the one from th
305. rm that the Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended radio button is selected and click Next Select the Specify a location check box and deselect other check boxes Click Next Other Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box opens When using Intel R PRO 1000MT Dual Port Network Connection specify lt CD ROM drive letter gt WINNT W2K BCS5 PRO1000 WIN2K Then click OK Click Next Click Finished After re installing the network drivers the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified Refer to Network Driver described earlier Installing Windows 2000 F 13 Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver x For the graphics accelerator driver the use of a remote KVM console that installs the advanced N8115 02 remote management card is supported by the standard 1 2 3 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer Run SETUP EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K VIDEO SETUP EXE Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could
306. rupt for a serial port A IRQ 4 PS 2 Mouse Disabled If disabled PS 2 mouse port will not Enabled function Auto Detect USB Host Controller Disabled If disabled the USB ports do not Enabled accept the USB device class 3 HID Human Interface Device Legacy USB Disabled Selects whether the USB keyboard is Support Enabled made available in OS which does not support USB formally Parallel ATA Disabled Selects parallel ATA is enabled or Channel 0 disabled Channel 1 Both Serial ATA Disabled Selects whether the serial ATA is Enabled enabled or disabled Factory set 4 12 Configuring Your Server Advanced Chipset Control Option Parameter Description Your Setting Enable Multimedia No Specify whether the system supports Timer Yes the multimedia timer feature Wake On Disabled Specify whether the remote power on LAN PME Enabled function through embedded NIC PCI devices in slots 1 to 5 is enabled or disabled Wake On Ring Disabled Specify whether the remote power on Enabled function through a serial port is enabled or disabled Wake On RTC Disabled Specify whether the remote power on Alarm Enabled function by using RTC alarm feature is enabled or disabled Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 13 Security The Security menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of Security Press Enter on Set Supervisor Password or Set User Passwo
307. rve the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details PY Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevant standard Disconnect the power cord s before installing or removing the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See f pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Do not lift the server only by a single person Always install the server in the specified place Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Setting Up Your Server 3 7 Restricted Access Location The server is intended for installation in a Restricted Access Location mounted above a non combustible material ESD Precaution An electrostatic discharge ESD can damage disk drives option boards and other components You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground when handling system components Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity To prevent damage keep them in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system Checking Components Confirm that the follow
308. rver 2003 has finished the system reboots automatically Windows Server 2003 has been installed Go on the step 15 Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed Go on the step 12 12 13 14 15 Installing Windows Server 2003 E 11 When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed the Windows setup screen will be displayed after logged on to the system IMPORTANT m In this case the Windows setup screen may not be displayed Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the following procedures m You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after the application of System update Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 In this case note that the Windows setup screen is not displayed Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Confirm the parameters and click OK When the installation has completed remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM from the CD ROM drive and restart the system When the installation has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of manual SCSI controller N8103 56 If your system has a controller N8103 56 following message often appears on the display during the upgrade installation to Windows Server 2003 Please type D i386 and click OK D CD Drive Insert disk The file adpul
309. rver and appreciate its functions to the maximum extent ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This User s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server This User s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup or operation of the server Keep this manual for future use The following describes how to proceed with this User s Guide How to Use This User s Guide To aid you in finding information quickly this User s Guide contains the following information Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server includes information that needs attention to use the server Make sure to read this chapter before setting up and using the server It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and disposal of the server Chapter 2 General Description includes information necessary to use the server such as names and functions of its components handling of the floppy disk and CD ROM drives Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server tells you how to select a site unpack the system assemble the rack mount subsystem make cable connections and power on your system Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility and the Adaptec Configuration Utility which is used to configure SCSI devices in your system This chapter also provides information on mother board jumper settings Chapter 5 Installing the Op
310. rver in which the MegaRAID controller mounted 6 22 Installing and Using Utilities m MegaRAID Registration Server Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network Install in one of NEC Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network The above components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to use Power Console Plus Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and management PC m Server NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted Install the following three components in this server MegaRAID Service Monitor MegaRAID Server MegaRAID Client Management PC Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network TCP IP When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4 0 Terminal Server Edition prepare PC and install Management PC component Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client which used Terminal Server Terminal Server Emulator WBT Start Power Console Plus of management PC after the Power On machine that installed Server and Management Server Install the following component in this PC MegaRAID Client Management server Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs MegaRAID Registration Server Instal
311. rver is turned off during rebuild processing the processing is stopped Restart the server mount the new hard disk drive in hot swap mode and then perform rebuild processing again Observe the following notes on using the auto rebuild function Do not turn the power off Once the power is turned off the auto build function does not start m Let 90 seconds or more pass between when dismounting a failing hard disk drive and when mounting the new one Do not replace a failing hard disk drive while rebuild processing is being performed for another hard disk drive LAN Connector LEDs There are two LEDs for each of the two LAN ports connectors on the rear panel UL HE eOr OO ome 0 SPEED LINK ACT SPEED LINK ACT LEDs Each LINK ACT LED indicates the status of the standard network port of the server While power is supplied to the server and HUB and the connection is correct the LED is on green The LED turns green and flashes while the network port is transmitting receiving data If the LED does not go on when the LINK state is placed check if the network cable is in normal state and if it is connected correctly If the LED does not go on yet when the network cable is normal the network LAN controller may be faulty In this case contact your sales representative Speed LED This LED indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped with the serve
312. rvice representative m Use the Exit menu when exiting the SETUP utility Exiting the utility with the POWER switch or reset operation causes the stored parameters to lose 4 2 Configuring Your Server Starting SETUP Utility Powering on the server starts POST Power On Self Test and displays its check results If the NEC logo is displayed press Esc After a few seconds the following message appears at bottom left on the screen Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility the password entry screen appears Enter the password Enter password Up to three password entries will be accepted If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive times the server halts You can no longer proceed Power off the server NOTE The server is provided with two levels of password Administrator and User With the Administrator password you can view and change all system parameters With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited Configuring Your Server 4 3 Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage Use the following keyboard keys the bottom of the screen Indicates there are submenus to work with the SETUP utility Key functions are also listed at Indicates the current menu PhoenixB10S Setup Utility Main Advanced Security Server Bo
313. ry Press M Do not select this option unless you are a high level user or a system administrator If you use this option you can recover the problems of system files partition boot sector and start up environment Quick Recovery Press F This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the procedure If you select this option the system recovery disk program starts to recover the problems concerning system files partition boot sector of system disk and start up environment if multiple operating systems are installed on the system 11 12 13 14 Troubleshooting 8 33 Follow the instruction displayed on the screen and then press L at the screen which request you to insert system recovery disk The system will be restarted once NOTE Starts the procedure without system recovery disk Repeat steps 4 to 11 The recovery procedure will be started During the recovery the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files in C 1386 folder of hard disk drive or the files in systemroot Repair of the system partition These replaced files do not reflect the changes of the configuration after the setup at all Follow the instruction displayed on the screen If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure it is useful to diagnose how the system has been damaged Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful
314. ry for Windows 2000 System in this Chapter The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log Description D The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with this system contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors is supported Q Has the CPU been expanded If the different revision stepping of the processor is installed in the multiprocessor system Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup If this message is logged it is no problem for operation The OS presents unstable operation Q Did you update the system Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable operation Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to update the system See Chapter 6 The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs though the system is adjusted to automatically restarting gt When the system does not restart automatically restart it manually 8 20 Troubleshooting The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs though the system is NOT adjusted to automatically restarting There is no problem about this issue Check the System Event Log to confirm that STOP error occurred Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen
315. s for system administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows 2000 or other operating systems contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems NOTE Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup complete the hardware configuration NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes two distinct programs One can be booted under DOS for initial setup and one is for use under Windows operating system m DOS based with local console Used to set up the server at the first time This program is also used to diagnose the server and to install uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the system drive DOS based with remote console Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over the network or via serial port B NOTE No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this program Installing and Using Utilities 6 3 m Windows based This program is called as Master Control Menu that can run under the Microsoft Windows system Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4 0 or later You can install the several applications and read the documentation from the menu Gp EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu x Online Document NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series l iy maiterGonvormenu Setup NSL 6 Q u i Copyright NEC Corporation N EC 6 4 Installing and Using Utilities NEC
316. s not supported at present After installation set the protocol through Control Panel In this case rebooting is not necessary The details of a network adapter cannot be set Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters Start Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 and set the details through Control Panel More than one network board is connected during setting of setup information but TCP IP cannot be set for each network Perform the installation procedure during DHCP setting To create a temporary IP configuration perform the installation procedure during DHCP setting and then set TCP IP again through Control Panel Problem with Disk Array Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurred on disk array in this system Troubleshooting 8 27 COLLECTING EVENT LOG This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server 4 5 IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system NOTE The different revision processor may be mixed in additional CPU kit When Windows 2000 is used following message may be appeared in the System Log of the Event Viewer after extension the different revision of two or more CPUs in the NEC Express server If this message is logged it is no problem for operation aixi Event Date 7 3 2001
317. s the following issues m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Specify teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environment tolerant on any trouble and enhance through put between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Program Accessory and click Explorer 3 Run PROSET EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM DriveLetter gt WINNT W2K BCS5 PROSET WIN2K The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish ORNS a E a Restart the system Installing Windows 2000 F 11 Network Driver When PROSet is not installed 1 5 6 Click Start menu and click Network and Dial Up Connection The Network and Dial Up Connection dialog box appears Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the s
318. seescesseeseceeecesccesecesecaecsaeeaecnaecsaecaaecaeecseeeaeeeeeeaseeeeesereeereenaes 7 1 CO FP ae ne eS ne eo oe eee 7 2 Cleaning the Serveric cos s 0 55 sncspeceies shagittaneed A E AT 7 3 Cleaning the Eana AEE ET EE hss iddute S 7 4 Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse c ccccccscesssesscesscesecesecesecsecseecseesaeseneeeaeseseseeeneenseenseeeaeenseenaes 7 5 Cleaning CD ROM amp orcs secesce scesedensceevasciesedtn E E uaetinteden see cele edee E E A E E 7 6 System Diagnostics ccc seds ceccivg cessbbeg even gencvscn cece shee tee etcacdegs REES E E TE E iea 7 7 Test MEMS he aeara E ee E ET EE AE E caves vou tinevons T EAER 7 7 Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics ccescececsseesseeseeeseeeeeeeeceeceseeeseceaecaeceeeseeeneeses 7 8 Relocating Storing The Servet ccccssccssecssecsessseeseecseeeseeeseeeeseenseenseenaeceaecnaecseecaeeeneeseeeneeeeseees 7 11 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ccccceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeenseseeeeeaeseeeeeeeeseeneesesnnens 8 1 Syste VIEW ETS hs ris Ahaha Betti eh eet need Te ea ae ee 8 2 EEDS innn nea Murat cutee meen I AEE ATA RTE E AEN 8 3 Error MESSAGES ontroeren en a A E A E S E A ETE ESA 8 4 Error Messages after POWeYr OD cccccesccessceseceseceseessecaeeeseeesecaeecaeeeneeeeeeeeeeesesseenseenseenaeenaeenaes 8 4 POST Emoe Messagesiasccsehusnelancoyenseassessdtacage E aaa A a e E Genes sneer vesganen sae 8 5 Beep Oa l EE EEE hans E A E A E 8 9 SOLVING kigel LE R
319. shows the location of the front system features 1 Front bezel The front bezel is a cover protecting the front devices during daily operation A security key is provided to lock the cover 2 Key slot Insert the security key into this slot when unlocking the front bezel 3 POWER LED green This LED turns green when the power is turned on 4 DISK ACCESS LED green amber This LED is green during access to the internal hard disk drives The LED turns amber when even one of the internal hard disk drives fails 5 ACT LED green This LED is on while the system is connected to the network The number 1 on the icon indicates LAN port 1 and the number 2 indicates LAN port 2 6 UID LED blue This LED goes on when the UID switch is pressed The LED also goes on or flashes when software issues a command 7 STATUS LED green amber on the front panel This LED indicates the server status The LED is green during normal operation The LED turns amber or flashes when the server enters the abnormal state General Description 2 5 Front View with Front Bezel Removed Hot plug SCSI hard disk drive model See 3 7 on the previous page 10 11 Handles 1 at the right and left each Hold the handles when dismounting mounting the server from in the rack Serial port B COM B connector Connect device having a serial interface to this connector Such as remote console PC USB connectors 2 ports Connect
320. size is 512MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 1000MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB Application Size 2292MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 2 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk F 4 Installing Windows 2000 INSTALLING WINDOWS 2000 Preparations for Installation m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM m Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server CD ROM m Windows 2000 Service Pack CD ROM m User s Guide m Getting Started m Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows 2000 you do not need to create it again You can create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedur
321. sk drive SCSI ID2 SCSI backplane Mother board 9 40 Upgrading Your Server The following figures show the example of cable connection for RAID configuration Connecting SCSI cable to optional RAID controller in low profile PCI slot Hard disk drive SCSI IDO o R 0 3 0 ss Q ja bO Dde sa o o 52H Hard disk drive FRONT SCSI ID1 REAR Hard disk drive SCSI ID2 N8103 86F disk array controller Connecting SCSI cable to optional RAID controller in full height PCI slot Hard disk drive SCSI connector SCSI IDO i i Hard disk drive SCSI ID1 FRONT I SCSI ID2 Hard disk drive N8103 80F 81F disk array controller Oe Upgrading Your Server 9 41 IMPORTANT Some disk array controller boards have more than one channel connector They may have connectors for internal connection and external connection However the connectors may be under exclusive specification in consideration of the internal connection of the disk array controller board Make sure that each connector channel is for internal connection or external connection For the connectors and channels see the manual provided with the disk array controller board m Example of connecting the SCSI cable This section explains the procedure for connecti
322. sk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them Do not place any magnetic objects e g magnet near the floppy disk Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust Other Precautions B 3 m Write protection A floppy disk has a write protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure Write protection notch Write Write disabled enabled You can read data from a write protected floppy disk but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format it NEC recommends that you should write protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data To write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk use the write protect switch provided on its back m Disk format To write data into a floppy disk the floppy disk must be formatted Formatting is to initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment operating system IMPORTANT m Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it if any m Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line The format method depends on your operating system Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system for details m Data backup Data backup
323. ssage There is no disk in the drive is shown during the Update of System click Cancel or Continue and continue the update To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures 1 Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member of the Administrators group Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen Click on Setup with left mouse button and click on Update NEC Express5800 system section Continue your work for system update as the following message Click on Restart Computer to restart the system Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive immediately after clicking on Restart Computer IMPORTANT If you change the configuration of the system by adding or removing hardware or Operating system software components or repair the system you must run the system update again F 10 Installing Windows 2000 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section please refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Be sure to install Utilizing PROSet enable
324. ssembly on the correct inner rail make a mark on the assemblies Similarly when installing more than one server distinguish between the pairs of inner rails and rail assemblies of the servers by making marks Installing the Core Nuts Install three core nuts on the front of the rack for each of the right and left sides and also two core nuts on the rear of the rack for each of the right and left sides Install three core nuts in 1U the minimum unit of rack height Three slots angle holes are opened per 1U ofa rack Install the core nuts at the three slots For any NEC rack round marks are put in the unit of 1U For one core nut installed on the front of the rack the lower nut is used to fix the front of the rail assembly and the upper nut is used to support the set screw of the server The core nuts installed on the rear of the rack are used to fix the rear of the rail assemblies e_ o_Jo o PUURUOBBOR ooo QOOHUOeeBRUHoUoOoOo Q Je_je_je_jo_ Jo 3 10 Setting Up Your Server Hang either clip of a core nut on a square hole on the rack and insert another clip into the hole by using a tool such as a flat tip screwdriver NOTE Confirm that all the core nuts are installed at the level Setting Up Your Server 3 11 Installing the Rail Assemblies Make sure of the right side rail assembly or the left one when insta
325. stalled on the rack and then slowly push the server into the rack If the server is locked on its way into the rack slowly push it in while pressing the release levers on the right and left sides of the server When the server is installed for the first time the mechanical parts are rather hard to slide You may feel strong friction when pushing in the server In this case strongly push it in Release lever Setting Up Your Server 3 13 3 Confirm that the sliding rails work normally by pulling the server out of the rack and pushing it in several times NOTE Confirm that the sliding rails work normally If the sliding rails are stuck to the rack frame and do not come out reinstall them Securing the Server Captive thumb screws 1 Push the server into the rack as far as it will go 2 Tighten the right and left captive thumb screws on the front panel to secure the server to the rack 3 Install the front bezel This completes the installing of the server 3 14 Setting Up Your Server Removing the Server from the Rack Assembly The server should be removed from the rack by at least two persons
326. sted in Chapter 8 Set Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu to Yes This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details To add one or more CPUs to the server in 1 CPU configuration to operate the server with more than one CPU change the driver of Computer in the device manager to ACPI multi processor PC and then update the system see Chapter 5 NOTE Step 19 is required when the Hyper threading technology feature is disabled in the BIOS SETUP Utility 9 32 Upgrading Your Server Removal To remove the CPU prepare the removal referring to steps and 6 in the installation procedure and do the reverse procedure of steps 12 to 8 IMPORTANT m Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed m Install the dust cover onto the vacant processor socket m After the operation heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to the CPU To remove the heat sink from the CPU first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and or socket to be defected Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed or replaced 1 Start SETUP to select menus Main Processor Settings Processor Retest in the order to clear the error information on the removed CPU see Chapter 4 When a CPU is replaced select menus Main
327. sted in dialog box 1 Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup After the parameters file is specified the message Do you want to review or modify the Setup File parameters appears 2 Ifyou want to modify or confirm the parameters file click Review If not click Skip Click Review Go on the next step Click Skip Go on the step 9 NOTE If you do not use disk array controller go on the step 9 After that the dialog box appears Using a blank disk 1 Click the box under Setup File Name A or press A The dialog box appears 2 Input the file name and click Use 8 Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration NOTE If you do not use disk array controller go on the next step If a Disk array controller is connected to the server or the HostRAID is enabled the Configure RAID dialog box appears Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click OK When the dialog box is closed the Express setup automatically performs the RAID configuration creating Maintenance partition and installing several utilities 9 Select the installing Operating system Select Windows from the menu 10 11 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 11 Select the Windows family Select Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition category NOTE If you select Skip at step 8 t
328. stem board temperature memory failure crashes and software failure information m Performance ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information such as the rate of CPU load memory usage disk usage and LAN traffic Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and prevent server overloads For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO refer to the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Installing and Using Utilities 6 19 Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition hereinafter abbreviated to ASMBE is a Web based application that locally or remotely manages Zero Channel RAID hereinafter abbreviated to ZCR and HostRAID storage system provided by Adaptec Inc IMPORTANT Be sure to use ASMBE on the system other than Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition To monitor and manage HostRAID on Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition use Adaptec Storage Manager hereinafter abbreviated to ASM Features m Maintaining ZCR and HostRAID storage system m Making a consistency check on redundant disk arrays m Recording ZCR and HostRAID events into the event log m Omitting the installation of client software into each management PC if the previously mentioned browser is installed This is because ASMBE uses the browser Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Before attempting to operate ASMBE re
329. stem may fail to operate with the transfer rate of 115 2 Kbps for serial console redirection Specify any other transfer rate than 115 2 Kbps 6 10 Installing and Using Utilities Starting The following two methods are available to start the server m Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN m Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection COM B For the procedure for starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console see NEC DianaScope IMPORTANT Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS SETUP NEC EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the CD ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system To use this feature you need 3 5 inch floppy disk Please prepare the floppy disk NOTE The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as shown below LAN Controller Serial Port A Base I O Address Interrupt Serial Port B Base I O Address Interrupt BIOS Redirection Port Baud Rate Flow Control Console Type Enabled Enabled 3F8 IRQ 4 Enabled 2F8 IRQ 3 Serial B 19 2K CTS RTS PC ANSI Installing and Using Utilities 6 11 Top Menu Shown below are the top menu items m Setup Automatically sets up the server m Tools Launch the features of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually m Help Help message on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER m Quit Quit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Setup
330. stment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers NOTE The keyboard functions depend on the software Refer to the manual that comes with the software for details B 6 Other Precautions Mouse Like the keyboard the mouse is a device to instruct your computer Many OS s and application software require the mouse for operation NOTE m Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software For details refer to the manual provided with the software m Use the mouse on a clean desk Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse When your mouse movement seems dull clean your mouse See Chapter 7 Mouse operation includes Click Double click and Drag Click Press the button only once and release it Double click Press the button twice consecutively and release it Drag Press and hold the button and move the mouse Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard CR Pressing a ey Click Double click Drag Appendix C IRQ The factory set interrupt requests is listed below Find an appropriate one to install an optional device IRQ Peripheral Device Controller IRQ Peripheral
331. system NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server See Chapter 6 To create a support disk Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk or the OEM floppy disk used for a manual installation of Windows See Chapter 6 To update the BIOS Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server See Chapter 6 To update the Windows System Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu Windows based NEC EXPRESSBUILDER feature updates the several resources of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows 2000 See Chapter 6 To install the utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes some management software for Windows NEC ESMPRO NEC DianaScope and so on and maintenance utilities for DOS System diagnostics Off line Maintenance Utility and so on You can install the applications for Windows from Master Control Menu and install the utilities for DOS from Tools menu See Chapter 6 To read the online documents You can refer to the online documents from Master Control Menu See Chapter 6 These functions are available under the Windows system NOTE Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer via cross cable COM or LAN See Chapter 6 for details 2 28 General Description NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the operating system The NEC ESMPRO inclu
332. t System Information Management Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive oe el Select Save 5 50 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Exceptional Setup This section explains how to set up the server by the exceptional way You usually do not have to do as follows If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM FD for Mass storage device except ones listed in Chapter 5 set the server as follows The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by Express Setup If you want to install the Operating system when the server has new mass storage device not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER follow the steps below 1 Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server 2 Ifthe mass storage device is disk array controller configure the RAID system before running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 3 Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM a When the message Do you want to use the parameters file appears select Yes b When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears check Use Existing Array c Check Apply OEM FD for Mass storage device 5 Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the Express Setup Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive Continue the Express Setup referring to messages d
333. t is enabled in the BIOS Setup m Must enter the user password to exit secure mode If only the supervisor password is set you Must enter the supervisor password to enter BIOS Setup Must enter the supervisor password to boot the server if Password on Boot is enabled in the BIOS Setup m Must enter the supervisor password to exit secure mode If both passwords are set you m May enter the user password to enter BIOS Setup However you will not be able to change many of the options m Must enter the supervisor password if you want to enter BIOS Setup and have access to all of the options m May enter either password to boot the server if Password on Boot is enabled in either the BIOS Setup m May enter either password to exit secure mode Secure Mode Configure and enable the secure boot mode by using the BIOS Setup When secure mode is in effect m You can boot the server and the operating system will run but you must enter the user password to use the keyboard or mouse m You cannot turn off system power or reset the server from the front panel switches Secure mode has no effect on functions enabled via remote server management or power control via the watchdog timer Taking the server out of secure mode does not change the state of system power That is if you press and release the power switch while secure mode is in effect the system will not be powered off when secure mode is later removed However if the
334. t to select the proper hard disk drive If not the data will not be restored 5 The message Do you want to make this array as bootable to prompt you to specify the boot priority of the new array appears Select YES to specify or NO to ignore and then press Enter NOTE The boot priority can be changed after the arrays have been created To change priority see Boot Priority described earlier Configuring Your Server 4 37 6 Select Yes for the message Create Array and press Enter Selecting No terminates creating an array and returns to the main menu 7 Select Yes for the message Are you sure and press Enter Selecting No terminates creating an array and returns to the main menu 8 Press Esc when the message Build Completed is displayed to return to the main menu NOTE On the main menu make sure that Optimal is indicated for the status of the created array IMPORTANT After creating an array set the boot priority for the created array according to Boot Priority 4 38 Configuring Your Server Creating RAID1 Array To create a RAID1 array perform either of the followings m Create a new RAID array m Migrate to RAID array using the data stored in an existing single disk Migration Creating RAID1 array using the existing single hard disk drive is called migration In migration the source hard disk drive must have been used as the boot disk in the standard SCSI
335. tails MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Pak wn Select Save Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration You can configure your system as well as option boards you may add to your system using the BIOS Setup Utility Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOS Setup which is stored in the system FLASH memory The Adaptec Configuration Utility detects the SCSI host adapters on the system board Use this utility if you need to configure the two SCSI controllers in your system to configure the hard disk drives connected to a SCSI controller as a RAID drive or to perform a SCSI disk format or verify disk operation on the SCSI disk drives The Adaptec Configuration Utility is also used to configure any SCSI removable media devices installed in your system If your system has been factory configured the BIOS Setup or
336. talling the hard disk drive back again m Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in progress The DISK LED flashes in green and amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk drive Upgrading Your Server 9 13 Removal SATA fixed HDD model Remove the hard disk drive in the reverse procedure of the installation In the disk array configuration the auto rebuild function can be used The auto rebuild function can record the information saved in a defected hard disk drive into the new replaced disk to recover the server to the state before the occurrence of the fault The auto rebuild function is valid for disk arrays set to RAID1 See Chapter 4 for detail explanation 9 14 Upgrading Your Server Power Supply Unit SCSI Hot plug HDD Model Your server contains one or two power supplies The second power supply is optional and provides a redundant configuration that ensures continued operation of the system in the unlikely event one of the power supplies fails Installation Take the following steps to install a power supply unit 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare IMPORTANT Be sure to turn off the power Failure to do so causes the server to malfunction or fail 2 Pull the cable arm toward the rear of the server and confirm the slot for installing an optional power supply unit 3 Hold and pull the lever of the blank cover and remove
337. ted due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m For more information on Recommended value see Partition Size to be Created described earlier m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 9 Click OK The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 25 Windows Dr Watson Windows Dr Watson is a debugger for application errors If any application error is detected Dr Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information log Follow the procedure below and specify Dr Watson to collect diagnostic information 1 2 Click Run on Start menu Type drwtsn32 exe in the Open box and click OK The Dr Watson for Windows dialog box appears Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the Log File Path box The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name DRWTSN32 LOG NOTE You can not specify network pass Specify the pass on local computer Specify the location of crash dump file in the Crash Dump box NOTE Crash Dump File is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger Check the following check box on the Option box O Dump Symbol Table O Dump All Threa
338. the Advanced menu if your internal SATA hard disk drives are configured with the SATA HostRAID feature To clear passwords or the CMOS data use the jumper switch on the mother board of the server The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location IMPORTANT Do not change any other switch settings Any change may cause the server to fail or malfunction CH Strapped JBAT1 O Protect o O Clear Pin for protecting 12 3 clearing the CMOS contents J7 O Protect O O Clear UL EJ Pin for protecting clearing the password ia i a 4 20 Configuring Your Server The following describe the clearing procedure A WARNING gt O S Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not remove the lithium battery a Do not connect the ground line to a gas pipe A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself Make sure to complete
339. the Autorun function is invalid in your system run the MC IST EXE file in the CD ROM directly Some items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the administrator or the item is not proper for the system To use Master Control Menu m Click on Online Document Setup or Quit or m Click the right mouse button on Master Control Menu window 6 14 Installing and Using Utilities CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR Configuration Diskette Creator is a tool to create Configuration Diskette that is used for configuring the server with the Express Setup see Chapter 5 for details If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette Creator to operate the setup you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification Also you can install the system with the same specification as before when re installing the system We recommend you to create Configuration Diskette to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER IMPORTANT You can not create Configuration Diskette for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions NOTE You can install Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000 without Configuration Diskette Also you can modify newly create Configuration Diskette during the setup with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Configuration Diskette This section describes about specifying set
340. the cover with captive thumbscrew NOTE If the logic cover cannot be closed firmly remove the drive cover before installing the logic cover 9 22 Upgrading Your Server DIMM Install the additional DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module to the DIMM socket on the mother board in the server The mother board is provided with eight DIMM board slots NOTE Up to 16GB of memory 2GB DIMM x 8 can be installed The factory installed DIMMs need to be replaced in this case Two DIMMs of 512MB are installed in DIMM slots 7 and 8 at shipment IMPORTANT m The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC Installing a third party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged Upgrading Your Server 9 23 Installation Order DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order 7 and 8 5 and 6 3 and 4 then 1 and 2 Install DIMMs starting from the one having smallest capacity
341. the drive letter modify it according to the Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter F 8 Installing Windows 2000 Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following procedure 1 Click Start menu right click My Computer and specify Manage to start Computer Management P Specify the Disk Management in the left side of the window Right click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the Change Drive Letter and Path Click Yes Choose the Assign a drive letter and specify the drive letter you want to assign Click OK a Oe 2 a If the following message appears click Yes Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no longer run Are you sure you want to change this drive letter 8 Close the Computer Management Installing Windows 2000 F 9 Updating the System Installing Service Pack IMPORTANT This system does not support Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 3 If you install Windows 2000 CD ROM which contains Service Pack 4 to your system you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again NOTE If you run the Update of System with the MO device connected refer following attention lt If you insert the MO media gt Remove MO media from the MO device immediately after clicking on Restart Computer lt If you do not insert the MO media gt If the me
342. the rebuilding again to make the installation positions of hard disk drives and the configuration of an array using the disks same as those before the configuration of the array Without the operation the boot priority may be changed The priority can be changed by the SCSISe ect Utility The timeout message below may be recorded into the event log if I O operation is delayed while HostRAID is running with a high load applied However HostRAID internal processing retries the I O processing and the delay does not influence AP and system operations Event source a320raid sys Event ID 9 Description The device Device Scsi a320raid did not respond within timeout period Arbitrary When Hot Spare Rebuild is performed please perform Rebuild again to become the original hard disk drive mounting position and the same position If this work is not done a boot priority may change A boot priority can be changed in BIOS To start the system from the created array be sure to create a bootable array See Chapter 4 Boot Priority in this manual If you do not create a bootable array the memory dump can not be collected when a trouble occurs Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 53 lt SATA HostRAID gt Only use the HostRAID drive as a system drive Only a hard disk drive can be connected to a channel with which HostRAID is enabled through the BIOS setup utility To connect a device other than a hard disk drive
343. the server The POWER LED indicates that the server is running in the power saving mode sleep mode If the OS supports the power saving mode such as Windows 2000 running the command blinks the POWER LED in green and place the server in the power saving mode Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER LED and place the server back in the normal mode The power saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power saving feature Some OS s allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power saving mode when no access is made to the server for a certain period of time or to select the power saving mode with a command STATUS LED The STATUS LED is on green while the server is operating normally The rear panel also has the STATUS LED on it Ifthe STATUS LED is off or turns amber and flashes it indicates that the server is in abnormal state The table below explains the STATUS LED indication the meanings and the procedures NOTES m IfNEC ESMPRO or the offline maintenance utility is installed you can confirm the cause of a failure by referring to the error log m If shutdown processing can be performed through the operating system when you want to restart the system after turning the power off restart the system by performing shutdown processing If shutdown processing cannot be performed restart the system by resetting forcibly turning the power off or disconnecting and then connecting the power cord
344. the server only by yourself The server weighs max 20 kg depending on its hardware configuration Carrying the server only by yourself may strain your back Hold the server firmly by its bottom with another person to carry it Do not hold the front door to lift the server The front door may be disengaged from the server causing personal injury Do not install the server in any place other than specified Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this User s Guide Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire m a dusty place m a humid place such as near a boiler m a place exposed to direct sunlight m an unstable place Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not install the server on a rack with the cover being removed Failure to follow this instruction may reduce the cooling effect in the server to result in some malfunction and or dusts to enter the server to result in a fire or electric shock Do not pinch your finger with rails or other components Note sufficiently that your fingers may not be caught between a rail and another mechanical part or cut by a rail at installation or removal of the server from the rack Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack Doing so bends the frame of the server Consequently the server cannot be pushed back into the rack Placi
345. the tray NOTE Do not touch the signal side of the CD ROM with your hand Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Do not wipe the lens of the CD ROM drive Doing so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive Push on the tray front to close the tray Wipe the signal side of the CD ROM with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Wipe CD ROMs from the center to the outside Use only CD ROM cleaner if necessary Cleaning a CD ROM with record spray cleaner benzene or thinner causes damage to the CD ROM contents At worst inserting the CD ROM into the server may cause failure Maintenance 7 7 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server Use the System Diagnostics program in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to diagnose the server Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics Memory m CPU cache memory m Hard disk drive used as a system IMPORTANT When executing the System Diagnostics make sure to remove the LAN cable Executing the System Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected the network may be influenced NOTE On checking the hard disk drive no data is written into the disk 7 8 Maintenance Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics There are two ways to diagnose the server to use the local console keyboard of the server itself and to use the management PC via serial port remote console
346. ther the hard disk drive is correctly connected The system specific information The system specific information can t be does not exist on the baseboard acquired in the mother board exchange and Please restore the backup data so on or write the data by using System Information Management of the Off line Maintenance Utility Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this operation 8 22 Troubleshooting Problems with Express Setup Express Setup can not be used Express Setup do not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions If you want to perform re setup see Appendix D and perform Manual Setup Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk drive that has smaller capacity than the specified partition size The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk Setup will continue the process OK Itis not an abnormal condition Press Enter to continue the installation The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD ROM or checking CD ROM Press R When the message appears again even if you press R restart the Express Setup from the beginning In case the same result occurred after the restart of installation contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to check the CD ROM
347. this warning may cause a gas explosion A CAUTION gt gt amp e PP gt gt Plug in to a proper power source Use a proper wall outlet Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak Do not install the server where you need an extension cord Use of a cord that does not meet the power specifications of the server may heat up the cord and cause a fire Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet which may cause a fire Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug imperfect contact may cause a fire Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug increasing the possibility of fire Use the authorized power cord only Use only the power cord that comes with your server Use of an unauthorized power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow Also observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord m Do not stretch the cord harness m Do not alter modify or repair the m Do not pinch the power cord power cord m Do not bend the power cord m Do not secure the power cord with m Keep chemicals away from the staples or equivalents power cord m Do not use any damaged power Do not twist the power
348. tically Log on Automatically After restarting the computer the installation is completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 35 Installing the Windows 2000 Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the wizard You can also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk as a setup file NOTE Prepare a floppy disk to use as Configuration Disk if you want to save the parameters or use the drivers located on the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device that ships with optional boards When using the floppy disk the Express setup can continue the setup without specifying the parameters 1 Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server NOTES m If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS m Ifyou create multiple logical drives in your system refer to Reinstalling the operation system when multiple logical drives exist Appendix D 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server 3 Press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The system boots from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts 4 Click Express Setup 5
349. tion No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server This disk is utilized for Windows 2000 clean installation and for Recovery for Windows 2000 system No need when installing the operating system with the Express Setup ROM DOS Startup FD Creates a support disk for starting the ROM DOS system Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD Creates a support disk for activating the Off line Maintenance Utility System Management FD Creates a support disk for activating the System Management Setup Maintenance Partition Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and executable commands In this menu you can create the maintenance partition install the various utilities and update the utilities The maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are system diagnostics System Management and Off line Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu If the processing is discontinued the system becomes unable to start m The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from the operating system In order to retain the Configuration Dat
350. tional SCSI controller for details Cannot install the operating system correctly Q Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system See Chapter 6 Fail to start the OS m m Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and restart the server Is the OS broken Use recovery process to recover the system See Recovery for Windows 2000 System in this Chapter 8 16 Troubleshooting The server is not found on the network O Is the LAN cable connected Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms with the network interface standard Q Is BIOS configuration correct The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration Onboard NIC Embedded NIC Dual Gbit gt Q Have the protocol and service already configured Install the distinctive network driver for the server Make sure that the protocol such as TCP IP and services are properly specified Q Is the transfer speed correct Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the va
351. tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix F Installing Windows 2000 describes how to install Microsoft Windows 2000 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows 2000 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix G Product Configuration Record Table provides a table to be filled with your server configuration Text Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this User s Guide For safety symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier IMPORTANT Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server NOTE Helpful and convenient piece of information IN THE PACKAGE The carton contains various accessories as well as the server itself See the packing list to make sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged If you find any component missing or damaged contact your sales agent m Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience You will need them to install an optional device or troubleshoot the server as well as to set it up m Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk if any Store the original disk as the master disk in a designated place and use its copy m Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD ROM may alter your system environment If you find anything unclear immediately ask your sales agent for help CONTENTS Preface mnn ii E N
352. tosee You will not be able to keep good working posture and you will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal and vertical angles Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions The most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment well lighted room or insufficient light Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy tosee An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes Adjustment of Keyboard Angle The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers Cleaning of Equipment Clean equipment regularly It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight Fatigue and Rest If you feel tired you should stop working and do light exercises 1 16 Notes on Using Your Server This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 2 General Description This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server It includes names and functions of the components and features of the server 2 2 General Description OVERVIEW Your server is a modular
353. u can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create Support Disk from Tools E 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 Select Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Create Support Disk menu Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Master Control Menu Master Control Menu runs on the following operating systems Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64 Edition Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Me 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Master Control Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Run the operating system Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Master Control Menu will appear Cli
354. uable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems in Chapter 5 Re install the Network Driver The network driver will be installed automatically Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver For the graphics accelerator driver the use of a remote KVM console that installs the advanced N8115 02 remote management card is supported by the standard 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run SETUP EXE in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT DOTNET VIDEO SETUP EXE Follow the message to continue the installation Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system E 18 Installing Windows Server 2003 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 65F If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the S
355. ul operation may affect the system operation m Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory Ignore this message and proceed Restarting the system may result in dumping improper data Preparing for Memory Dumping Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart In such a case it is required to force the server to shut down This forced shutdown however is not available if Enable is selected for Power Switch Inhibit on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP because this setting disables POWER switch operation Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server 1 Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility SETUP 2 Select Disable for Power Switch Inhibit in the Security menu 3 Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP 8 30 Troubleshooting Saving the Dump File Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs Insert a metal pin a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch DUMP switch Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory Memory dumping may not be available when the CPU stalls IMPORTANT Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break Troubleshooting 8 31 RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000 SYS
356. ult in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack SPOS 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare NOTE To confirm the device you are going to maintain use the UID switch and the UID LED that goes on when the switch is pressed 2 Loosen the thumb screws at the right and left of the front panel hold the handles and slowly pull out the server from the rack The server is locked while you are pulling it Stop pulling when it is locked E me E z J o a z J o lgi q o o o o E o eCo mrs 333 06 aaa I p a ERE E MLE EJE o C a o B 5 o o a ml T Al o T q o o E q o T J o o z o C a C q T an Captive thumb screws Upgrading Your Server 9 19 To place the server in the rack push it back into the rack while pressing the right and left lock arms IMPORTANT Be very careful not to get your finger caught in the arms or rails Release lever 9 20 U
357. up information that is necessary for OS installation and creating Configuration Diskette Follow the procedure below NOTE In the procedure below the folder name that is specified when installing Trekking command is assumed as Configuration Diskette Creator Start the OS 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu will appear 3 Right click on the screen or left click Setup The menu will appear GQ NEG EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu a x Onlin NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series Master Control Menu O seu Copyright NEC Corporation N EC Installing and Using Utilities 6 15 4 Click Configuration Diskette Creator Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed 5 Click Create New Information files from the File menu The Disk Environment dialog box will be displayed Configuration Diskette Creator File Option HELP Modify information files CtkO Print Print Preview Printer Setup Exit ion Diskette Creator Ltd NEC Corporation2006 Creatine new setup information files 6 Specify each item and click on OK The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order such as Disk Environment dialog box OStoinstal ME mmm ox OS language Engish E Cancel Disk setup Hep T RAID F Greate new RAID Total number of attached dives TS Number of dives indive group 7
358. ur after specifying the process below the message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory may appear but continue to start the system If you restart the system in such case memory dump may not be stored correctly Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Select Control Panel and click System The System Properties dialog box appears 2 Select Advanced tab 3 Click Settings on the Startup and Recovery group box Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 23 IMPORTANT Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 1MB In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Windows Server 2003 To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that spec
359. urce provided Non LVDs devices generally are terminated through a jumper or resistor pack on the device itself General Description 2 19 Network Controller NOTE To ensure EMC product regulation compliance the system must be used with a shielded LAN cable The mother board uses a dual channel Ethernet Controller and supports 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T network subsystems The network controller supports the following features 64 bit 100 MHz PCI X interface Integrated IEEE 802 3 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T compatible PHY IEEE 820 3u auto negotiation support Chained memory structure similar to the 82559 82558 82557 and 82596 Full duplex support at both 10 Mbps 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps operation Low power 3 3 V device On the system board NIC 1 can be used as both a network interface and server management interface 2 20 General Description Keyboard and Mouse The keyboard mouse controller is PS 2 compatible A Y cable can be used if both a PS 2 mouse and keyboard are required at the same time ACPI The mother board supports the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI as defined by the ACPI 2 0 specifications An ACPI aware operating system can put the system into a state where the hard drives spin down the system fans stop and all processing is halted However the power supply will still be on and the processors will still be dissipating some power so the power supply fans will
360. urface with a pencil or ball point pen Do not open the shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid e g water and chemicals Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects e g magnet Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust A floppy disk has a write protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure You can read data from a write protected floppy disk but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format it NEC recommends that you should write protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data To write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk use the write protect switch provided on its back Write Write disable enable The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media Dust or thermal changes as well as operator s misconduct or sever failures may cause loss of data To avoid loss of data NEC recommends that you should make a back up copy of your valuable data on a regular basis Make sure to make a back up copy of every floppy disk provided with the server General Description 2 39 CD ROM Dr
361. use MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port interface USB 4 pin 4 ports 2 for front panel 2 for rear panel Serial DB 9 2 ports 1 for front panel 1 for rear panel Network RJ 45 2 ports Display MINI D sub 15 pin 1 port SCSI None for SCSI model only Power supply Non hot swappable Fan 5 Cabinet design Rack mount type 1U External dimensions 425 width x 43 height x 718 depth mm Weight Max 15 kg 17 kg Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 10 200 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 1 Hz Power consumption maximum 430 VA 425 W Environmental Temperature 10 to 35 C operating 10 to 55 C non operating storage requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Others NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported NEC ESMPRO provided in the standard configuration Excluding the front bezel Appendix B Other Precautions Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller The mother board includes the two network interface controllers that supports 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T networks and a capable of full or half duplex The both controllers can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB However for proper network operation specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Server Management Software The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO
362. useful information for maintenance Power Off Follow the procedure below to power off the server If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS IMPORTANT Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server 1 Shutdown the OS 2 Press the POWER switch on the front of the server The POWER LED goes off 3 Power off peripheral devices 2 36 General Description Identification of Servers UID Switch An UID Unit ID LED is provided on the front panel and rear panel If more than one server is mounted in a single rack the LED identifies the server you are going to maintain The UID LED goes on when the UID Unit ID switch on the front panel is pressed It goes off when the switch is pressed again Maintenance from the rear of the rack has to be carried out in a dark narrow space The interface cable of a server or power supply unit in normal state may be disconnected by accident in this situation To prevent this problem you should start maintenance after confirming the target server by using the UID switch UID LED UID switch UID LED General Description 2 37 Floppy Disk Drive The server is provided with the 3 5 inch floppy disk drive on its front to write read data to from a floppy disk The server supports the followi
363. ve the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not carry or install the server only by a single person Do not install the server where the load may be concentrated on a specific point Do not install any component on the server only by a single person Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Do not provide the wiring exceeding the rating power 3 4 Setting Up Your Server Do not install the rack in the places listed below Installing the rack or mounting the server on the rack in such a place may cause some malfunction to occur Narrow space from which devices cannot be pulled out from the rack completely Place that cannot bear the total weights of the rack and devices mounted on the rack Place where stabilizers cannot be installed or where the rack can be installed only after the practice of proper earthquake resistant construction Place of uneven or slanting floor Place of drastic temperature change near a heater air conditioner or refrigerator Place where intense vibration may be generated Place where corrosive gas is generated chemicals are nearby or chemicals may be accidentally sprayed over Place where a carpet not subject to anti static process is laid Place where some o
364. ver 1 Make sure all external devices such as a video display keyboard and mouse optional have been connected and the power cords are connected Power on the video display and any other external devices Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD ROM drive contains no bootable CD ROM Open the front bezel Press the POWER switch NOTES m Ifthe power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the UPS turn on the power control unit If the remote management card RMC is installed in your server connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the POWER switch The POWER switch does not work in a few seconds after connecting the power cord due to RMC firmware start up Setting Up Your Server 3 21 POWER LED POWER switch The POWER LED on the front of the server comes on In a few seconds the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self Test POST begins The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation Ctrl Alt Delete The POST runs diagnostics initializes the server sets interrupt vectors detects installed peripheral devices and boots the operating system if installed See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST If the server halts before completing the POST the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error requiring im
365. ver still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem take a note on the on screen message and contact your service representative Problems with the Server Fail to power on the server Q Is the server is properly supplied with power Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet or UPS that meets the power specifications for the server Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on If the power cord is plugged to a UPS make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power See the manual that comes with the UPS for details Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS SETUP utility of the server lt Menu to check Server AC LINK gt Q Did you press the POWER switch Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power the POWER LED lights Fail to power off the server CL Is the POWER switch enabled Restart the server and start the BIOS SETUP utility lt Menu to check Security Power Switch Inhibit gt Q Is the server running in the Secure Mode The POWER switch is disabled in the Secure Mode Forced shutdown is also not available To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility Troubleshooting 8 11 No screen display appears with
366. vice Slot 1 size Capacity Serial No Model name Typenumber Date Installed PCI Slot 1B Model name Serial No Date Installed Model name SeriaiNno Date Installed Model name Serial No Date Installed Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 2B PCI Slot 3B PCI Slot 1C PCI Slot 2C Model name Seriaino Date Installed o PCI Slot 3C Model name Seriaino Date Installed en Printer Model name Serial No Manufacturer Cate Installed Additional Cabinet for Disk Model name Serial No pO ate instaticd External Peripheral Device 1 Modelname CT Seria Now Manufacturer atte Installed External Peripheral Device 2 Modelname CT Seria Now O Manufacturer CT atte Installed External Peripheral Device 3 Modelname Seria Now Manufacturer CT atte Installed External Peripheral Device 4 Modelname CT Seria Now Manufacturer CT atte Installed Product Configuration Record Table G 3 Software nei Cae OS Name Version Application of RUR media O Apply Name Version File system O FAT O HPFS 7 NTFS O Others noo od Licensed software installed Application running when a failure occurred G 4 Product Configuration Record Table This page is intentionally left blank
367. wledge Base Article ID 170756 Available Switch Options for the Windows NT Boot ini File If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing adding PAE switch in Boot ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory However the Microsoft operating system products which support PAE switch option are limited Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products m Microsoft Knowledge Base Article ID 291988 A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch F 16 Installing Windows 2000 Below is the example on how to add PAE switch to Boot ini file 1 2 3 Click Start point to Programs point to Accessories and then click Notepad On the File menu click Open In the Open dialog box in the Look in drop down list box click systemroot drive In the Open dialog box in the Files of type drop down list box click All Files and in the File name drop down list box enter Boot ini And then click Open The content of Boot ini file will be displayed Add PAE to Operating Systems section in Boot ini file and then save it lt Example of Boot ini file gt boot loader timeout 30 default multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINNT operating systems multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition 1 WINNT Windows 2000 fastdetect multi 0 disk 0 rdisk 0 partition
368. ws Me 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Master Control Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Run the operating system Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Master Control Menu will appear Click on Setup with left mouse button and click Make OEM DISK and then for Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely D 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 1 2 3 Turn on the system power Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary
369. y Controller Och Adaptec HostRAID SCSI Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller E 2 Installing Windows Server 2003 lt SATA Model gt m Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER N8103 80F Disk Array Controller SCSI Ich N8103 81F Disk Array Controller SCSI 2ch Adaptec HostRAID SATA Controller on the I O board m Other optional boards N8103 56 SCSI Controller N8103 65F SCSI Controller N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8190 126 SCSI Controller Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update Express5800 system in Master Control Menu Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue m Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition Manual Installation when N8103 80F 81F 86 and SCSI HostRAID and SATA HostRAID Keeps Connection If y
370. your service representative 0230 System RAM Failed at offset Contact your service representative 0231 Shadow Ram Failed at offset 0232 Extended RAM Failed at address line 0250 System battery is dead Replace and run Contact your service representative to replace SETUP the battery After restarting the computer start the SETUP to provide the setting again 0251 System CMOS checksum bad Default The default values have just been set Start configuration used the SETUP to provide the setting again If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0252 Password checksum bad Passwords The password has just been cleared Start cleared the SETUP to provide the setting again 0260 System timer error Start the SETUP to set the date and time 0270 Real time clock error again Ifthe same error occurs successively 0271 Check date and time setting in spite of the resetting contact your service representative 02B0 Diskette drive A error Start the SETUP to set the Legacy Floppy A in the Main menu again If the same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting contact your service representative 02B2 Incorrect Drive A type run SETUP Start the SETUP to provide the setting again If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 02D0 System cache error Cache disabled The cache cannot be used Contact your service representative 8 6 Troubleshooting
371. ystem memory Serial port A COM A connector Connect device having a serial interface to this connector A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector USB connector Connect device compliant with the USB interface to this connector LAN connectors Connect network systems on the LAN to the connectors The number 1 following the bold faced number indicates LAN port 1 and the number 2 indicates LAN port 2 Speed LED amber This LED indicates the transmission speed of the LAN LINK ACT LED green This LED indicates the access status of the LAN Monitor connector Connect the display unit to this connector 2 8 General Description Internal View 44 43 42 41 48 5 6 7 52 2 0 ooooony 000000 000000 gl oo t 8 1 4 5 12 4 6 4 9 4 10 4 7 11 10 1 CD ROM drive 2 Disk bays Each number following the bold faced number indicates the channel number Item 2 1 is used only for SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 3 Floppy disk drive A Cooling fans Each number following the bold faced number indicates the fan number Fans 3 4 5 6 and 9 are redundant options for SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model Fan duct Mother board Remote Management Card oN OW Power supply SATA fixed hard disk drive model 8 1 Standard SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 8 2 Option SCSI hot plug hard disk drive model 9 Riser card assembly 10 DIMM 11 Processor mounted under the
372. ze is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 2900MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB Application Size 4192MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Pagi
373. zzle and electrostatic protection computer grade canned air and a small brush for cleaning the interior Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server A WARNING re Unplug all power cords Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance Voltage is present inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off All voltage is removed only when the power cord is unplugged Turn off the server and unplug all power cables Remove the logic cover and drive cover See Chapter 9 Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the mother board aS S gt Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the interior of the server Reinstall the left side cover See Chapter 9 Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server Maintenance 7 5 Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off powered the POWER SLEEP LED goes off and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation To keep the mouse ball clean use the mouse in a place with little dust Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly 1 10 11 Prepare cold or lukewarm water neutral detergent alcohol two dry soft clothes and cotton swabs M

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Untitled    Erst denken, dann klicken. - Konsumentenrechte  here - Micromat International  Manuale di istruzioni  File - Orgues Nouvelles  OPTICLIMATE PRO3-B    DVS 99000153 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file